TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

City of Shreveport, Louisiana

Department of Engineering and Environmental Services

Public Landing Lift Station Improvements

C.I.P. Project No.: F13003

Funded by: 2015 W&S Revenue Bonds

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

April 29, 2020

Prepared by:

Raley and Associates, Inc. Owen Engineering, LLC

Bossier City, Louisiana 71111 Shreveport, Louisiana 71101


Public Landing Lift Station Improvements TOC-1

Table of Contents

Technical Specifications:

The City of Shreveport “Standard Plans and Specifications for Infrastructure Improvements,

2015 Edition, or most recent revision, shall govern this project, including Part 1 ‐ General

Provisions, as well as the most recent City of Shreveport Water & Sewage Specifications. The

above referenced Specifications shall be referenced for all applicable work items. Standard

Specifications for this project include, but are not limited to, the following list which are hereby

referenced:

Section 200 Aggregates ................................................................................................. 200

Section 201 Concrete, Mortar, and Related Items ......................................................... 201

Section 203 Soil and Grasses ......................................................................................... 203

Section 207 Miscellaneous Metal Items ........................................................................ 207

Section 209 Water and Sewer ‐ Piping and Appurtenances ........................................... 209

Section 210 Paint and Protective Coatings .................................................................... 210

Section 301 Clearing and Grubbing................................................................................ 301

Section 302 Removal of Structures and Obstructions .................................................... 302

Section 304 Fill Construction ......................................................................................... 304

Section 305 Borrow Excavation ..................................................................................... 305

Section 310 Temporary Erosion Control ........................................................................ 310

Section 401 Subgrade Preparation ................................................................................ 401

Section 403 Aggregate Base .......................................................................................... 403

Section 509 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement ........................................................ 509

Section 601 Concrete Structures ................................................................................... 601

Section 605 Concrete Curbs, Walks, Gutters, Driveways ............................................... 605

Section 606 Concrete Reinforcement ............................................................................ 606

Section 802 Metal Railings ............................................................................................. 802

Section 803 Chain Link Fence......................................................................................... 803

Section 1002 Excavation and Backfill ............................................................................. 1002

Section 1003 Abandonment of Existing Water Main and Sanitary Sewer Facilities ....... 1003

Section 1004 Trench Safety Systems ............................................................................. 1004

Section 1005 Trench Dewatering ................................................................................... 1005

Section 1006 Boring, Tunneling, and Pipe Jacking Operations ....................................... 1006

Section 1101 Painting .................................................................................................... 1101

Section 1201 Landscaping and Seeding ......................................................................... 1201

Section 1203 Erosion Control Systems........................................................................... 1203

Section 2100 Sewer Force Mains ................................................................................... 2100

Section 3200 Water Service lines and Meter Boxes ....................................................... 3200



The foregoing referenced Standard Specifications shall be supplemented with the following Part

40 ‐ General Requirements, Technical Sections, and Special Provisions:

PART 40 ‐ General Requirements:

Section 4000 Seals and Certifications ............................................................................ 4000

Section 4010 Summary of Work .................................................................................... 4010

Section 4025 Measurement and Payment ..................................................................... 4025

Section 4026 Pay Estimates ........................................................................................... 4026

Section 4035 Change Order Procedures ........................................................................ 4035

Section 4038 Requests for Information ......................................................................... 4038

Section 4050 Project Controls (Surveying) ..................................................................... 4050

Section 4110 Storm Water Permitting Procedures ........................................................ 4110

Section 4200 Project Meetings ...................................................................................... 4200

Section 4300 Submittals ................................................................................................ 4300

Section 4310 Construction Scheduling .......................................................................... 4310

Section 4322 Photographic Documentation .................................................................. 4322

Section 4370 Schedule of Values ................................................................................... 4370

Section 4400 Quality Control ......................................................................................... 4400

Section 4410 Testing and Testing Laboratory Services .................................................. 4410

Section 4562 Dust Control ............................................................................................. 4562

Section 4580 Project Identification Signs ....................................................................... 4580

Section 4600 Delivery, Storage and Handling ................................................................ 4600

Section 4630 Substitutions and Product Options .......................................................... 4630

Section 4700 Contract Closeout .................................................................................... 4700

Section 4710 Cleaning ................................................................................................... 4710

Section 4720 As‐Built Drawings ..................................................................................... 4720

Section 4740 Warranties and Bonds .............................................................................. 4740

Technical Sections:

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Section 5500 Miscellaneous Metal ................................................................................ 5500

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods .................................................. 16050

Section 16060 Grounding and Bonding ......................................................................... 16060

Section 16120 Conductors and Cables ........................................................................... 16120

Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes .............................................................................. 16130

Section 16135 Underground Utility Structures .............................................................. 16135

Section 16140 Wiring Devices ....................................................................................... 16140

Section 16289 Transient Voltage Suppression ............................................................... 16289



Section 16290 Lightning Protection ............................................................................... 16290

Section 16410 Enclosed Switches .................................................................................. 16410

Section 16491 Fuses ...................................................................................................... 16491

Section 16521 Exterior Lighting ..................................................................................... 16521

Section 16718 Conductors and Cables for Electric Safety and Security ......................... 16718

Special Provisions:

SP 100.2 Standard Work Week .............................................................................. 100.2

SP 103.7 Reports .................................................................................................... 103.7

SP 108.3.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades .................................................... 108.3.3

SP 108.6.4 Property Restoration ............................................................................ 108.6.4

SP 108.11 Overtime ............................................................................................... 108.11

SP 109.2 Utilities in Public Right‐of‐Way ................................................................ 109.2

SP 110.1 Subletting of Contract ............................................................................. 110.1

SP 209.5.2.1 Water and Sewer – Piping and Appurtenances .......................................... 209

SP 310 Temporary Erosion, Sedimentation and Water Pollution Prevention and

Control in the Right‐of‐Way ....................................................................... 310

SP 1002 Excavation and Backfill ............................................................................. 1002

SP 1003.3.2 Abandonment of Manholes ............................................................... 1003.3.2

SP 1005 Trench Dewatering ................................................................................... 1005

SP 1201 Topsoil ...................................................................................................... 1201

SP 1202.2 Mobilization .......................................................................................... 1202.2

SP 2200.3.9 Manhole Bypass Pumping .................................................................. 2200.3.9

SP 2220 Monolithic Manhole Lining Systems ........................................................ 2220

SP 2300.4 Gravity Sewer Pipe and Manhole Testing .............................................. 2300.4

SP 2800 Packaged Submersible Lift Station ........................................................... 2800





GENERAL REQUIREMENT SPECIFICATIONS


Public Landing Lift Station 00002-1

��

�� !��"#�� $%%&��&

�%��'��%��%��(��$�(��(��$%��!��(��

�� ($&� ��( )��& ��*�� $�(�� &�'� ��

��$��+

��*��*��, -��-+.$�� /��+

��*��0��, -+)��1��/)+�+

��*��0��+, � ��234

��, ��!��2/�"4

��&5��*��$��

4/28/2020


Public Landing Lift Station Improvements 4010-1

SECTION 4010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 LOCATION OF WORK

A. The work of this Contract is located at or adjacent to the City of Shreveport, Caddo Parish, Louisiana at the sanitary sewer lift station site known as Public Landing located about the 5900 block of South Lakeshore Drive.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the indicated rehabilitation or replacement of the lift station listed above.

1.03 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Perform Work to accommodate City’s occupancy during the construction period and to ensure completion of the Work in the Contract Time. Completion dates of the various stages/lift station sites shall be in accordance with the approved construction schedule submitted by the Contractor.

1.05 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. Contractor will have complete and exclusive use of the premises for the performance of the Work.

B. Contractor shall coordinate the use of the premises with the City. Facilities, or Process Units requiring shutdown due to construction related activities shall be coordinated with the City as noted in writing one week prior to taking any Facility or Process Unit out of service.

C. Contractor shall limit the use of the premises for its Work and for storage to allow for:

1. Work by other contractors.

2. City occupancy

3. Public use.

D. Coordinate use of premises with Engineer.

E. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for security of all its subcontractor’s materials and equipment stored on the site.

F. If directed by the Engineer, move any stored items which interfere with operations of City or other contractors.

G. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas if needed to perform the Work.

H. Contractor shall obtain permits needed for the proposed work.

1.06 CITY OCCUPANCY



A. City will occupy premises during performance of the work for the conduct of its normal operations. Coordinate all construction operations with Engineer to minimize conflict and to facilitate City usage.

1.07 IDENTIFICATION BADGES

B. The Contractor shall furnish Clean Water Shreveport identification badges for its workers and its subcontractors directly engaged in construction activities in streets and servitudes. The badges shall include the name and photograph of the worker, the name of the Contractor, and information furnished by the City. Badges shall be approximately 2.25- inch x 3.5-inch with vertical photo and graphics printed front and back in full color, high quality digital output in the format furnished by the City. Badge materials may be PVC or laminated card stock.

C. Furnish generic, temporary Clean Water Shreveport identification badges for use by individual workers engaged in construction activities for fewer than 5 days over the duration of the Work. Temporary badges shall be similar to photo identification badges in the format furnished by the City.

D. The City will furnish printed materials with contact information for Clean Water Shreveport. The Contractor shall distribute City-furnished materials to its workers and subcontractors for use during work activities. Workers shall keep Clean Water Shreveport identification badges in their possession during work activities. Instruct workers that one purpose of the badges is to reassure members of the public that the individual is working on a Clean Water Shreveport project, and that he has duties which require his presence in proximity to homes and businesses. Workers shall display identification badges upon request and give City-furnished materials to the public wanting general information about the Work.

1.08 TREE REMOVAL AND TRIMMING

A. Tree removal and trimming shall be in compliance with the City of Shreveport Tree and Vegetation Removal Policy.

B. Contractor shall notify City prior to removal of any tree 12-inches in diameter or larger.

1.09 CITY-FURNISHED WATER

A. The City will furnish reasonable amounts of nonpotable water for the Contractor’s use for specified flushing and cleaning of pipelines, or for other approved uses as required for proper completion of the Work. Obtaining water from fire hydrant is prohibited. Nonpotable water for Contractor’s use is available only from bulk water supply stations at 4 locations: 3381 Carrie Avenue Intersection of LA Highway 1 and LA Highway 175 2900 Williamson Way 3400 Old Blanchard Road

Contact the City at (318) 673-7932 to request an application for used of the bulk water program. Payment of a $150 deposit to the City for each connection is required. The Contractor will receive a monthly water bill reflecting a meter fee of $12.44 and a cost of $4 per every 1000 gallons used. Access and connection to the water supply stations must be coordinated with the City. Connections to the water supply and use of water will not be permitted unless a City inspector is present. Contractor shall furnish all necessary hoses, valves, fittings and adapters for connection to the water supply. The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing run-offs during filling operations, and for disposal of



run-offs per the appropriate codes. The City’s obligation to furnish water is limited to the quantity and flow rates available from the designated source.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4025

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This Section includes requirements for the measurement and payment of various elements of the Work which are not already specified in the Standard Specifications. Measurement will be as specified in this Section and other General Requirements. Pay Items and requirements for measurement and payment specified in the Standard Specifications shall not be used for this project.

1.02 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous Construction Items, if indicated in the Bid Form, is considered a provisional amount to be used only if needed. Miscellaneous Construction Items are exclusive of work indicated in the Contract Documents for which payment is included under other items in the Bid Form. No work may be performed under Miscellaneous Construction Items without prior written approval of the City Engineer.

B. Prior to final payment, the original amount provided for Miscellaneous Construction Items will be adjusted to actual costs by deductive Change Order, adjusting the Contract Amount, accordingly.

C. The Contractor shall make no claim, nor receive any compensation, for anticipated profits, loss of profit, damages, or any extra payment due to any unexpended portion of the Miscellaneous Construction Items.

D. Work authorized by the City under Miscellaneous Construction Items may be performed as a lump sum (negotiated before the fact), unit prices (when applicable), or time and material. For work performed under time and material, Contractor shall submit detailed verification (breakdown) of all costs, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTRACT ITEMS

A. ITEM S-001 Project Sign

1. Measurement shall be per LUMP SUM with a schedule of values as specified in Section 4370

2. Payment shall include all Work shown and specified in the Contract Documents

B. ITEM S-002 Freeze-proof Yard Hydrant Assembly, Complete, in Place

1. Measurement shall be per EACH with a schedule of values as specified in Section 4370


C. ITEM S-003 1” Double Check Valve Assembly, Complete, in Place, incl. Housing





D. ITEM S-004 1” Service Tap with Corporation Stop



E. ITEM S-005 Trench Safety System for Excavation > 5’ Depth

1. Measurement shall be per LINEAR FOOT with a schedule of values as specified in Section 4370


F. ITEM S-006 Wet Well Lining System - Type 3 (10’ x 10’ x 22.3’ Wet Well)

1. Measurement shall be per SQUARE FOOT with a schedule of values as specified in Section 4370


G. ITEM S-007 Package Duplex Submersible Lift Station (Incl. Pumps, Smart Run Controls, Air Diffuser, Piping & Valves, Fiberglass Enclosure)



H. ITEM S-008 Aluminum 3’ x 5’ Access Hatches w/ Safety Grates



I. ITEM S-009 Metal Panel Shed



J. ITEM S-010 Electrical (Incl. Demolition, Main Disconnect, Conduits & Wire, Surge Protection, Ground, Relocate Telemetry & New Pole, Lighting)



K. ITEM S-011 Metal Handrailing, Chain & Removable Center Post



L. ITEM S-012 Truck Bumpers (13” x 20” x 4.5”)





M. ITEM S-013 Miscellaneous Construction Allowance

1. Measurement and Payment is specified in Paragraph 1.02 herein.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4026

PAY ESTIMATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Pay Estimates will be prepared by the Contractor, including supporting documentation and other items.

B. Unit Price Work will be measured for payment as specified in Standard Specification Section 111.

C. Stockpiled or Stored Material will be measured for payment as specified in Standard Specification Section 111. Refer to Standard Specification Section 111.7 for minimum storage period, maximum percentage of contract price, and other requirements.

D. The accepted Schedule of Values, specified in Technical Specifications Section 4370, will be used as the basis of payment for Contract Items measured by lump sum.

1.02 PREPARATION OF PAY ESTIMATES

A. Daily reports will be prepared by the Contractor on each working day, listing quantities of Unit Price Work and percentages of work items in the Schedule of Values completed during each working day. Each daily report shall be signed by Engineer and Contractor, to acknowledge agreement on completed Work identified in daily report.

B. The cutoff date for pay estimates is the last day of each month. The Contractor will prepare the Pay Estimate based on a summary of completed work items recorded on the daily reports each month.

1.03 DOCUMENTATION ASSOCIATED WITH PARTIAL PAYMENTS

A. Prepare and furnish additional documentation to coincide with each partial payment. The value of each item of required documentation on a monthly basis, established in the approved Schedule of Values or in respective Contract Items, will be included in partial payments whenever the respective item is provided in a timely manner.

B. After receipt of the first partial payment and prior to receipt of subsequent payments, certify in writing that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid for work and materials from previous partial payments received (less any retainage) by the Contractor.

C. On a monthly basis, furnish a completed Monthly Subcontractor Payment and Utilization Report – FSC Form 5 for subcontractors.

D. On a monthly basis, furnish an updated construction schedule as required in Technical Specification Section 4310.

E. Provide construction photographs in accordance with Technical Specification Section 4322.

1.04 STOCKPILED AND STORED MATERIALS

A. Furnish a monthly summary of stockpiled and stored materials in a format acceptable to the Engineer. Summary shall clearly indicate materials previously installed, materials received and installed during the current month, and net materials on hand during the current month. Summary shall identify the following information:



1. Contract Item number or scheduled item number

2. Description of specific material

B. Furnish the following documentation for stockpiled and stored materials:

1. Copies of invoices from supplier or manufacturer verifying the cost and quantity of material

2. If storage is on private property, a copy of the lease or agreement granting the Department right of entry to property

3. Certified copies of invoices from the supplier or manufacturer of each item for which payment has been made with the previous payment from the City. All such invoices shall state the amount received by the supplier or manufacturer as payment in full for the materials


PART 3 EXECUTIONS (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4035

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Promptly implement change order procedures.

1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes.

2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/ force account basis.

3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.

B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization:

1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the Work.

2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of the authorization of changes in the Work.

C. City will designate in writing the persons who are authorized to sign Field Orders, Miscellaneous Construction Authorizations, Work Change Directives, and Change Orders.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Standard Specification Section 100 Definitions and Abbreviations

B. Standard Specification Section 103 Scope of Work

C. Standard Specification Section 105 Changes in Work.

1.03 FIELD ORDER

A. Engineer may issue a Field Order for Contractor to proceed with a minor change which does not involve a change in Contract Amount or Contract Time.

B. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract Documents, order minor changes in the work, and/or memorialize trade-off agreements. Field Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments as necessary to define details of the change.

1.04 CONTRACT CHANGE REQUEST

A. City may initiate changes to plans, specifications, character of work, or quantity of work by submitting a Change Proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include:

1. Detailed description of the Change, Products and location of the change in the project.

2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications.

3. The projected time span for making the change and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized.



4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid.

5. Such request is for information only and is not an instruction to execute the changes, nor to stop work in progress.

B. Contractor may initiate changes in specified methods of construction and changes to plans and specifications which do not materially affect the Work, and which can be made at a reduction in cost or at no additional cost to the City, by submitting a written Change Proposal to the Engineer, containing:

1. Description of the proposed changes.

2. Statement of the reason for making the changes.

3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Amount and the Contract Time.

4. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Amount or Contract Time, as appropriate.

1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS

A. Support each quotation for a lump-sum proposal and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Engineer to evaluate the quotation.

B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations

1. Labor required.

2. Equipment required.

3. Products required.

a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost.

b. Quantities required.

4. Taxes, insurance and bonds.

5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented.

6. Overhead and profit.

7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.

C. Support each claim for additional costs and for work done on a time-and-material/force account basis, with documentation as required in Standard Specification Section 105.3.2 Payment.

D. Document requests for Substitutions for Products as specified in Section 4630.

1.06 AUTHORIZATION OF CONTRACT CHANGES

A. City may authorize changes or extra work that involves changes to Contract Price or Contract Time with a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization, a Work Change Directive, or a formal Change Order.

B. City may issue a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization to authorize changes or extra work with payment from the Miscellaneous Construction Items, if indicated on the Bid



Form, and changes to Contract Time. Authorization will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. It will designate the amount of payment and any change in Contract Time. A Miscellaneous Construction Authorization does not change the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. Authorized changes to Contract Time will be included in a subsequent Change Order.

C. City may issue a Work Change Directive for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order, either with or without initiating a change by first submitting a Change Proposal Request. Authorization will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Amount and any change in Contract Time. A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Amount or the Contract Time. Changes to the Contract Amount and the Contract Time will be included in a subsequent Change Order.

D. A formal Change Order is the only document that can change the Contract Amount and the Contract Time. City may issue a Change Order to change the Contract Time as authorized in a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization, to change the Contract Amount and Contract Time as designated in a Work Change Directive, and to authorize extra work and changes initiated by the City.

1.07 METHODS OF COMPENSATION FOR CHANGES

A. Content of Lump Sum/Fixed Price changes will be based on

1. Engineer’s Change Proposal Request and Contractor’s responsive Change Proposal as mutually agreed between City and Contractor

2. Contractor’s Change Proposal, as recommended by the Engineer

B. Content of Unit Price changes will be based on

1. Engineer’s definition of the scope of the changes

2. Contractor’s Change Proposal, as recommended by the Engineer

3. Survey of completed Work

C. Unit Prices will be those stated in the Contract or those mutually agreed upon between the City and the Contractor.

D. When the price for changes or extra work cannot be agreed upon, City will issue a Work Change Directive directing Contractor to proceed on the basis of time and materials/force account.

E. At the end of each day, submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in Standard Specification Section 105.3.2.1. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work.

1.08 ALLOWABLE COSTS FOR CHANGES

A. Allowable labor costs consist of payroll costs in the direct employ of the Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by the City and the Contractor. Such employees shall include superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on



the Work. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals, general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedules of jab classifications, are excluded from allowable labor costs. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expense of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, may be included in the above to the extent authorized by the City.

B. Allowable material costs consist of the cost of materials furnished and incorporated into the work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials shall accrue to the City, and the Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

C. Allowable labor costs for Subcontractors are the same as specified for the Contractor.

D. Allowable equipment costs for owned or rented equipment shall be paid by the following conditions.

1. Allowable rates for owned or borrowed equipment shall be the estimated cost reimbursement rates included within the original bid prices. If the Contractor’s established original bid rates are not available, the allowable rates shall not exceed those shown in the Rental Rate Guide Book for Construction Equipment (Blue Book) Volumes 1, 2, or 3 as applicable. If Blue Book rates are used, reimbursement will not be made for owned service trucks or other support equipment and vehicles, since their costs are normally included in equipment operating costs.

2. Owned pickups, if directly used in the performance of extra work, are eligible for reimbursement at the flat rate of $50.00 per day. If used by a superintendent or used primarily for transportation of employees, their costs are included in overhead and separate reimbursements will not be made.

3. Payment for owned or borrowed equipment will be made for the actual hours used in the extra work. Payment will not be made for time lost for breakdowns, repairs, or time after equipment is no longer needed for the extra work. If equipment is used intermittently while dedicated to the extra work, payment will be made for the duration that the equipment is dedicated to the extra work, but not more than 8 hours per day. While actually working during second and third shift work, payment will be made at one half the Blue Book ownership costs plus the estimated hourly operating costs. No reimbursement will be made while not actually working.

4. If ordered held available for extra work, idled owned or borrowed equipment will be paid for at an hourly standby rate computed as one half of the agreed working rate per hour, excluding operating costs. Reimbursement for standby will not be paid when the equipment would normally be idle, such as Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, days when weather conditions prevent working, during breakdowns or servicing, or when the equipment has actually worked or been paid for 8 or more hours in the day or 40 or more hours in the week.



5. Rental rates for rented or leased equipment shall be as paid by the Contractor. The allowable reimbursement for rented equipment shall be the agreed invoice cost. The invoice shall be marked “PAID” and initialed or signed by the Contractor. Allowable reimbursement for operating costs shall be as agreed between the City and Contractor.

1.09 ALLOWABLE MARKUP FOR CHANGES

A. The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (markup) for Lump Sum/Fixed Price changes shall be a fee based on the markup provided in Standard Specification Section 105.3.2.4.

B. The requirements of this paragraph apply to Time and Materials/Force Account changes.

1. For allowable labor costs, the markup shall be 10 percent.

2. For allowable material costs, the markup shall be 10 percent.

3. For allowable subcontractor costs, the markup shall be 5 percent.

4. For owned, borrowed, or rented equipment, the markup shall be 10 percent.

C. The allowable markup for changes is provided in Standard Specification Section 105.3.2.4.

1.10 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME

A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Changes to Contract Time identified in a Miscellaneous Construction Authorization or a Work Change Directive is evidence that City and Contractor expect that the change will be incorporated into a subsequently issued Change Order.

B. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delay beyond control of the Contractor, the Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay.

C. If anyone for whom the City is responsible delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then the Contractor will be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Amount or the Contract Time or both. The Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to the Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time.

D. If the Contractor is delayed in performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under control of the City, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of City and Contractor, then the Contractor will be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time, if such adjustment is essential to the Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Such an adjustment shall be the Contractor’ sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this paragraph.

E. For the purpose of this specification, a delay extends the duration of critical path. With any request for changes to Contract Time, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with sufficient documented evidence of the impact of a delay to the critical path. Documentation shall include identifying work activities affected by the delay, demonstrating that the affected work activities are critical path activities, and the impact to the critical path.

F. With any request for changes to Contract Time for delays related to abnormal weather conditions, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with sufficient documented evidence



to demonstrate the difference between normal and abnormal weather conditions for the Project location.

1.11 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS

A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values to record each change as a separate item of work, and to record the adjusted Contract Amount.

B. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time.

1. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes.

C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in As-Built Drawings.



END OF SECTION



SECTION 4038

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of Requests for Information (RFIs).

1.02 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the Contractor believes that additional information or clarification of a contract requirement is needed, they may initiate an RFI.

B. The RFI process shall be limited to the clarification of technical and/or administrative matters. While the response to an RFI might lead to a change in the contract scope, cost or time, RFIs are not a substitute to the notification requirements stipulated in the General Provisions.

C. A response to an RFI is not an authorization to perform any additional work that would require a change order or written amendment to the contract. If the Contractor believes the response an RFI requires a change to the Contract, Contractor shall promptly provide written notice to the Engineer in accordance with the General Provisions.

D. RFIs are not a substitute for the Submittals process specified elsewhere.

PART 2 PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ORIGINATION

A. The Contactor shall originate RFIs in the PMIS. Subcontractors and suppliers shall use the form appended to this section for submitting an RFI to the Contractor for subsequent origination of the RFI in the PMIS. RFIs submitted directly to the Engineer by subcontractors or suppliers will not be accepted.

1. RFIs are autonumbered in the PMIS. In the event that an answered RFI results in a follow-up inquiry, a new RFI must be originated and the RFIs may be linked.

2. Enter a short description of the question as the Title. For Reference Documents, include Specification Section(s), Drawing(s), or Submittal ID for which information is requested.

3. Attach drawings, sketches, photographs or other relevant information.

4. Indicate the date by which the Contractor requests a reply.

5. Enter the question. If the question concerns an interpretation of the Contract Documents, enter the Contractor's interpretation.

6. The Contractor will select the Workflow Actions “SUBMIT” and “SEND” to transmit the RFI to the Engineer.



3.02 PROCESSING

A. Contractor shall utilize the PMIS to submit all RFIs to the Engineer for processing.

B. All RFIs will be reviewed and answered by the Engineer.

C. The Engineer will generally respond to RFIs within seven calendar days of receipt in PMIS – depending on the complexity of the inquiry.

D. The RFI Log will be maintained in the PMIS, including the Status, Creation Date, and Due Date.

3.03 RESPONSES

A. If the RFI contains sufficient clarity, the Engineer will insert a response and “SUBMIT FOR ACKNOWLEDGMENT.” The Contractor shall “CLOSE” the RFI to indicate receipt.

B. If the RFI does not contain sufficient clarity, the Engineer may request additional information from the Contractor.

C. If the Contractor does not agree with the answer from an RFI, the Contractor shall create a new RFI and link it to the original RFI.

END OF SECTION (RFI Form for Subcontractors and Suppliers follows)



Request for Information for Subcontractors & Vendors

RFI Title: RFI No.: Assigned by PMIS

Project: Date Response Required By:

Project No.: Date Submitted:

Reference Documents

Submittal ID: Drawing No:

Specification Section: Other:

Attachments:

QUESTION:

Contract Interpretation or Proposed Solution

Cost Impact? Y/N

Estimated Cost:

Cost Impact Notes:

Schedule Impact? Y/N

Est Impact (Days):

Sched Impact Notes:

Submitted By: Company:

Date:

By: Date:

Submit Form to Contractor for entry into PMIS



SECTION 4050

PROJECT CONTROLS (SURVEYING)

PART 1 GENERAL.

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK.

A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for project; including but not limited to:

1. Survey work required for project controls and layout.

B. Retain the services of a qualified individual licensed in the state of Louisiana to:

1. Identify existing control points and property line corners indicated on the Drawings.

2. Verify and record the locations of all proposed structures and facilities.

1.02 SUBMITTALS.

A. Submit, to the Engineer, the name, address and state registration and license number of proposed registered land surveyor.

B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR.

A. Individuals performing construction layout or cadastral surveying shall meet the qualifications established by the laws and rules of the Louisiana Professional Engineering and Land Surveying Board.

1.04 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS.

A. The City will provide reference points which in the Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable the Contractor to proceed with the Work.

B. Locate and protect reference points prior to starting site work and preserve all permanent reference points during construction.

1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to and approval by the Engineer.

2. Report to the Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

3. Require the surveyor to correctly replace project control points which may be lost or destroyed. Establish replacements based on original survey control.

1.05 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS.

A. Establish a minimum of two temporary benchmarks on site, referenced to data established by survey control points.

1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data.



2. Temporary benchmarks shall be installed and spaced for convenient reference and used at locations along roadways, pipeline routes, and/or on the Site.

B. Establish lines and levels; locate and lay out:

1. Site improvements.

a. Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement.

b. Utility slopes and invert elevations.

c. Sidewalks, pavement, fencing, storm drainage facilities, and other finish surface work.

2. Batter boards for structures.

C. If lines, levels or layouts are lost or destroyed, or if required by the Engineer, verify layouts by same methods.

D. Establish all lines and grades prior to construction of line work for all force mains, transmission mains, storm drainage piping, gravity sewers and other new utility lines at 100-ft increments, at defined breaks in grade, and at manholes.

PART 2 PRODUCTS. (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION.

3.01 RECORDS.

A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4110

STORM WATER PERMITTING PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor and professional services necessary to prepare an Erosion Control Plan or Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for use in compliance with storm water permit requirements.

1. Prepare an Erosion Control Plan for Work where less than one acre of land will be disturbed by construction activities.

2. Prepare a SWPPP for Work where one or more acres of land will be disturbed by construction activities.

3. Prepare a Notice of Intent (NOI) where 5 or more acres of land will be disturbed by construction activities, and submit the NOI to the State prior to commencing land-altering activities. Prepare and submit a Notice of Termination (NOT) to the State after Final Acceptance of the Work.

B. Determine the area of disturbance based on the overall length of the project and the construction methods utilized for the Work, regardless of sequencing. Use a minimum width of 12 feet along the length of open trench excavation, dimensions of pipe and manholes, and specific methods of construction.

C. Refer to Standard Specification Section 310 for requirements to construct and maintain temporary erosion control features.

1.02 APPLICABLE REGULATIONS

A. Comply with all applicable Federal, State and local laws and regulations concerning storm water permitting.

1. City of Shreveport Code of Ordinances Article IV – Erosion and Sediment Control

2. LAC 33:IX.2511.B.15 (for ground disturbance area 1 acre to less than 5 acres)

3. LAC 33:IX.2511.B.14.j (for ground disturbance area 5 acres or more)

4. Title 40 CFR 123.5(a)(9), 122.26(a), 122.26(b)(14)(x) and 122.26(b)(15)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the Erosion Control Plan or SWPPP to the City before commencing land-altering activities including clearing, grading, excavating and filling.

B. Submit copies of the NOI and the NOT to the City for information.

1.04 EROSION CONTROL PLAN

A. The Permit Application and Erosion Control Plan shall satisfy requirements of Shreveport Code of Ordinances Section 34-123.

B. The Permit Application and Erosion Control Plan shall include the following items.



1. Grading and drainage plan showing

a. Date, scale, north arrow, and property lines

b. Location, type of use, and total percentage of existing and proposed improvements

c. Existing and proposed topographic features

d. Locations of all temporary and permanent runoff detention basins, along with any constructed and/or altered drainage systems

2. Erosion Control Plan showing

a. Description of temporary and permanent structural controls

b. Temporary and final stabilization

3. Schedule providing for site inspections at least every 2 weeks and after each rain event of ½ inch or more

4. List of measures to minimize offsite tracking of sediment on vehicles

5. Sequence of scheduled activities

6. The 100-year floodplains and/or floodways with related elevations

C. The Erosion Control Plan shall indicate the use of appropriate items specified in Section 310, Section 1201, Section 1203; shown on Standard Plans 310-1 through 310-11, and shown on the Drawings. Coordinate the plan with scheduling of ground disturbance activities.

1.05 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN

A. The SWPPP shall satisfy requirements of Louisiana DEQ Storm Water General Permit for Small Construction Activities or Louisiana DEQ General Permit for Discharges of Storm Water From Construction Activities 5 Acres or More.

B. The SWPPP shall include the following contents as described in the respective General Permit.

1. Site Description

2. Controls

3. Maintenance

4. Inspections

5. Non-Storm Water Discharges

6. Certification and Signature

C. The SWPPP shall indicate the use of appropriate items specified in Section 310, Section 1201, Section 1203; shown on Standard Plans 310-1 through 310-11, and shown on the Drawings. Coordinate the plan with scheduling of ground disturbance activities.




PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS

A. Post a notice near the main entrance to the construction site with the following information.

1. The LPDES permit number and effective date of the permit

2. The name and telephone number of a local contact person

3. A brief description of the project

4. Location of the SWPPP if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan

B. Make the SWPPP available on request to LDEQ, local government officials, and the operators of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site.

C. Amend the SWPPP as described in the respective General Permit whenever:

1. there is a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance, which has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants to the waters of the State and which has not otherwise been addressed in the SWPPP.

2. inspections or investigations indicate the SWPPP is proving ineffective or otherwise not achieving the general objectives of controlling pollutants in storm water discharges associated with construction activity.

3. a new contractor or subcontractor will implement a measure of the SWPPP.

4. measures are necessary to protect endangered and threatened species or historic properties.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4200

PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The City of Shreveport will schedule and administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work.

1. Prepare agenda for meetings.

2. Make physical arrangements for meetings.

3. Preside at meetings.

4. Record the minutes; include significant proceedings and decisions.

5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within 15 working days after each meeting.

a. To participants in the meeting.

b. To parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.

B. Representatives of Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.

C. Attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules.

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Attend a preconstruction meeting.

B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the City of Shreveport.

C. Attendance

1. Engineer and his/her professional consultants.

2. Resident Project Representative.

3. Contractor.

4. Major Subcontractors.

5. Major suppliers.

6. Utilities

7. Others as appropriate.

D. Suggested Agenda Items

1. Introduction of key project personnel

2. Lines of communication/procedures



3. Preconstruction submittal requirements

4. Key contract dates

5. Correspondence routing and distribution

6. Payment procedures

7. Submittal and shop drawing procedures

8. Project progress meetings

9. Project progress reports

10. City requirements and special project procedures

11. RPR duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority

12. Permits and coordination with local building officials

13. Safety procedures

14. QM procedures

15. Construction work schedule (days, hours, holidays, overtime)

16. Control of work requirements

17. Fair Share reporting requirements (Form 5)

18. Material storage requirements

19. Contractor’s staging area

20. Field Offices

21. Coordination with utilities

22. Homeowner/business notification and citizen complaints

23. Construction photographs and record drawings

24. Testing laboratory procedures

25. Conformed documents

1.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Attend periodic meetings at regular intervals determined by the City of Shreveport.

B. Attend called meetings as required by progress of the Work.

C. Location of the meetings: Project field office of Contractor or Engineer, or City Hall, or another location identified by the Engineer.

D. Attendance

1. Engineer and his/her professional consultants as needed.



2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda.

3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda.

4. Others as appropriate.

E. Suggested Agenda Items

1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting.

2. Review of work progress since previous meeting.

3. Submittals

4. RFI’s

5. Field Orders, Work Change Directives, Change Orders

6. Field observations, problems and conflicts.

7. Current Construction Schedule.

8. Progress, schedule, during succeeding work period.

9. Coordination of work activities.

F. Attend progress meetings and study previous meeting minutes and current agenda items, in order to be prepared to discuss pertinent topics such as deliveries of materials and equipment, progress of the Work, etc.

G. Provide a current submittal log at each progress meeting.

H. Provide an updated and accurate project schedule of work to be performed in the next 30 days.



END OF SECTION



SECTION 4300

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes the requirements for compiling, processing and transmitting submittals required for execution of the project.

B. Submittals are categorized into two types: Action Submittals and Informational Submittals, as follows:

1. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by the Contractor that requires the Engineer's approval. The following are examples of action submittals:

a. Shop drawings (including working drawings and product data).

b. Samples.

c. Operation & maintenance manuals.

d. Site Usage Plan (Contractor's staging - including trailer siting and material laydown area).

e. Schedule of values Pay Estimate format.

f. Construction Schedule (Original and monthly update, Time-Impact Analysis, etc).

g. Original and monthly update.

h. Time-Impact Analysis.

i. Outage Requests.

j. Vendor Training Outlines/Plans.

k. As-Built Drawings.

l. Warranties and Bonds.

m. Contract Close-out documents.

2. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by the Contractor that does not require the Engineer’s approval. The following are examples of informational submittals:

a. Shop Drawing Schedule.

b. Statements of Qualifications.

c. Health and Safety Plans.

d. Construction Photography and Videography.

e. Work Plans.

f. Maintenance of Traffic Plans.



g. Proposed Testing Procedures.

h. Test Records and Reports.

i. Test and Start-Up Reports.

j. Certifications.

k. Record Shop Drawings.

l. Submittals required by laws, regulations and governing agencies.

m. Submittals required by funding agencies.

n. Other requirements found within the specifications.

1.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit, at no additional cost to the City, submittals and details of structural and reinforcing steel, equipment, materials, electrical controls, architectural fabrications, pipe, pipe joints, special pipe sections, valves, pumps, mix designs, design/build documents, and other appurtenances, as required in the technical specifications.

All submittals and supporting data, catalogs, schedules, etc., shall be submitted as the instruments of the Contractor, who shall be responsible for their accuracy, completeness, and coordination. Such responsibility shall not be delegated, in whole or in part, to subcontractors or suppliers. These submittals may be prepared by the Contractor, subcontractors, or suppliers, but the Contractor shall ascertain that submittals meet all of the requirements of the Contract Documents, while conforming to structural, space, and access conditions at the point of installation. Designation of work “by others,” if shown in submittals, shall mean that the Work will be the responsibility of the Contractor rather than the subcontractor or supplier who prepared the submittals. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the Engineer in each case where its submittal may affect the work of another Contractor of the City. The Contractor shall ensure coordination of submittals among the related crafts and subcontractors.

Submittals shall be prepared in such form that data can be identified with the applicable specification paragraph. The data shall clearly demonstrate compliance with the Contract Documents and shall relate to the specific equipment or piece of work to be furnished. Where manufacturer’s standard drawings and catalog sheets are employed, they shall be marked clearly to show what portion of the data is applicable to this project.

B. Transmittal Procedures:

All submittals will be transmitted electronically from the Contractor through the City’s Project Management Information System (PMIS) via the internet. Training on the PMIS will be provided to the Contractor free of charge prior to the start of the project. Ongoing training and support to the Contractor will also be provided.

C. Submittal Registry:

The Contractor will submit a submittal registry listing all proposed submittals for the project to the City at, or before the pre-construction meeting. The submittal registry will include, but not limited to; technical shop drawings, samples, project baseline schedule and monthly updates, schedules, schedule of values, permit requirements, test results and certifications, operations and maintenance manuals, shutdown/outage requests, vendor training



outline/plans, warranties and bonds, record drawings, and spare parts. After review and approval of the submittal registry, the City will load the list of submittals onto the PMIS.

The Submittal registry list will have the following information:

1. Submittal Number – The submittal number will be made up of a six digit number, a period, and the two digit number (XXXXXX.XX). The first six digit number is the applicable specification section. The two digit number after the period is the sequential number for each item to be submitted under each specification section, in chronological order submitted, starting at .01.

2. Submittal Description – A description of what the submittal contains, or a list of items included in the submittal.

3. Vendor Name – Name of manufacturer, vendor, or subcontractor supplying the item in the submittal.

4. Substitution – Indicate if the item being submitted is a substitution from the specified product or vendor.

5. Submittal Date – Indicate the anticipated date for transmitting the submittal to the City.

6. Example:

Submittal # Description Vendor Substitution Date

221005.01 Ball Valves Milwaukee No 03/24/15

D. All submittals shall be clearly identified as follows:

1. Date of Submission.

2. Project Number.

3. Project Name.

4. Contractor Identification.

a. Contractor.

b. Vendor or Supplier

c. Manufacturer.

5. Identification of the Product.

6. Reference to Contract Drawing.

7. Reference to specification section number, page and paragraph(s).

8. Reference to Contract Item number.

9. Reference to applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Standards numbers.

10. Indication of Contractor's approval.

11. Contractor's Certification statement.



12. Identification of deviations from the Contract Documents, if any.

13. Reference to previous submittal (for resubmittals).

E. Submittals shall be clear and legible, and of sufficient size for legibility and clarity of the presented data.

F. Variances

1. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents.

2. Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of re-submittal (resubmission), of all deviations from previous submissions of that particular shop drawing, except those deviations which are the specific result of prior comments from the Engineer.

G. Action Submittals.

1. Shop Drawings

a. Shop drawings may include, but are not necessarily limited to, custom prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled information, setting diagrams, actual shop work manufacturing instructions, custom templates, valve schedules, wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, equipment inspection and test reports, and performance curves and certifications, as applicable to the work.

b. Contractor shall verify all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data, and coordinate each item with other related shop drawings and the Contract requirements.

c. All details on shop drawings shall clearly show the relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the drawings before being submitted.

d. All shop drawings submitted by subcontractors and vendors shall be reviewed by the Contractor. Contractor shall confirm, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers, technical data and performance criteria; and shall coordinate with other related shop drawings and the Contract requirements. In addition, Contractor shall confirm existing field conditions and dimensions and confirm that the submittal is coordinated and compatible with existing conditions. Submittals directly from subcontractors or vendors will not be accepted by the Engineer.

e. The Contractor is responsible for the accuracy of the subcontractor's or vendor's submittal; and, for their submission in a timely manner to support the requirements of the Contractor's construction schedule. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in error shall be returned to the subcontractor or vendor to correct, before submission to the Engineer. All shop drawings shall be approved by the Contractor.

f. Delays to construction due to the untimely submission of submittals will constitute inexcusable delays, for which Contactor shall not be eligible for additional cost nor additional contract time. Inexcusable delays consist of any delay within the Contactor's control.

2. Working Drawings



a. Detailed installation drawings (sewers, equipment, piping, electrical conduits and controls, HVAC work, and plumbing, etc.) shall be prepared and submitted for review and approval by the Engineer prior to installing such work. Installation drawings shall be to-scale and shall be fully dimensioned.

b. Piping working drawings shall show the laying dimensions of all pipes, fittings, valves, as well as the equipment to which it is being connected. In addition, all pipe supports shall be shown.

c. Equipment working drawings shall show all equipment dimensions, anchor bolts, support pads, piping connections and electrical connections. In addition, show clearances required around such equipment for maintenance of the equipment.

d. Electrical working drawings shall show conduits, junction boxes, disconnects, control devices, lighting fixtures, support details, control panels, lighting and power panels, and Motor Control Centers. Coordinate all locations with the Contract Documents and the Contractor's other working drawings.

3. Product Data: Product data include, but are not limited to, the manufacturer’s standard prepared data for manufactured products (catalog data), such as the product specifications, installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, rough-in diagrams and templates, product photographs (or diagrams), wiring diagrams, performance curves, quality control inspection and reports, certifications of compliance (as specified or otherwise required), mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions, recommended spare parts and product warranties, as applicable.

4. Samples.

a. Furnish, samples required by the Contract Documents for the Engineer's approval. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in the work unless and until approved by the Engineer.

b. Samples specified in individual Specification Sections, include, but are not limited to: physical examples of the work (such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work), small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and other specified units of work.

c. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract Requirements.

d. Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the Engineer or stored at the site of the work. Approved samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in work shall match the approved samples. Samples which fail testing or are not approved will be returned to the Contractor at his expense, if so requested at time of submission.

5. Contractor's Certification.

a. Each shop drawing, working drawings, product data, and sample shall have affixed to it the following Certification Statement:

"Certification Statement: by this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field



construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements."

b. Shop drawings, working drawings, and product data sheets 11-in x 17-in and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the above Certification Statement on the cover sheet. The transmittal cover sheet for each identified shop drawing shall fully describe the packaged data and include a listing of all items within the package.

6. Project work, materials, fabrication, and installation shall conform to approved shop drawings (including working drawings and product data) and applicable samples.

7. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing (including working drawings and product data) or sample shall be started, nor shall any materials be fabricated or installed before approval of such item. Procurement, fabrication, delivery or installation of products or materials that do not conform to approved shop drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk. Furthermore, such products or materials delivered or installed without approved shop drawings, or in non-conformance with the approved shop drawings will not be eligible for progress payment until such time as the product or material is approved or brought into compliance with approved shop drawings. Engineer will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity.

8. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in assembled manuals as specified. Such manuals shall include detailed instructions for City personnel on safe operation procedures, controls, start-up, shut-down, emergency procedures, storage, protection, lubrication, testing, trouble-shooting, adjustments, repair procedures, and other maintenance requirements.

9. Schedule of Values: On projects consisting of lump sums (in whole or in part) submit a proposed schedule of values providing a breakdown of lump sum items into reasonably small components – generally desegregated by building, area, and/or discipline. The purpose of the schedule of values is for processing partial payment applications. If requested by the Engineer, provide sufficient substantiation for all or some items as necessary to determine the proposed schedule of values is a reasonable representation of the true cost breakdown of the Work. The schedule of values shall not be unbalanced to achieve early payment or over-payment in excess of the value of work or any other inequitable distribution of the costs. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the schedule of values is unbalanced, Contractor shall reallocate components to achieve a balanced schedule acceptable to Engineer.

10. Site Usage: Submit a proposed site staging plan, including but not limited to the location of office trailers, storage trailers and material laydown. Such plan shall be a graphic presentation (drawing) of the proposed locations; and, shall include on-site traffic modifications, and temporary utilities, as may be applicable.

H. Informational Submittals

1. Shop Drawing Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule indicating when shop drawings are required to be submitted to support the as-planned construction schedule. The submittal schedule shall allow sufficient time for preparation and submittal, review and approval, and fabrication and delivery to support the construction schedule.

2. Construction Schedule: Prepare and submit construction schedules and monthly status reports as specified.



3. Statements of Qualifications: Provide evidence of qualification, certification, or registration, as required in the Contract Documents, to verify qualifications of licensed land surveyor, professional engineer, materials testing laboratory, specialty subcontractor, technical specialist, consultant, specialty installer, and other professionals.

4. Health and Safety Plans: Prepare and submit a general company Health and Safety Plan (HASP) modified or supplemented to include job-specific considerations;

5. Construction Photography and Videography: Provide periodic construction photographs and videography as specified in Section 4322 – including preconstruction photographs and/or video, monthly progress photos and/or video and post-construction photographs and/or video.

6. Work Plans: Prepare and submit copies of all work plans needed to demonstrate to the Engineer that Contractor has adequately thought-out the means and methods of construction and their interface with existing facilities.

7. Maintenance of Traffic Plans: Prepare maintenance of traffic plans where and when required by the Contract Documents and by local ordinances or regulations. If Contractor is not already knowledgeable about local ordinances and regulations regarding maintenance of traffic requirements, become familiar with such requirements and include all costs for preparation and submittal of traffic management plans and all associated costs for permits and fees to implement the traffic management plan, in the bid amount. In addition, unless a supplemental payment provision is provided in the bid form, include the cost of police attendance, when required.

8. Outage Requests: Provide sufficient notification of any outages required (electrical, flow processes, etc.) as may be required to tie-in new work into existing facilities. Unless specified otherwise elsewhere, a minimum of seven calendar days’ notice shall be provided.

9. Test Records and Reports: Provide copies of all test records and reports as specified in the various technical specifications.

10. Vendor Training Outlines/Plans: At least two weeks before scheduled training of City personnel, provide lesson plans for vendor training in accordance with the specification for O&M manuals.

11. Test and Start-up Reports: Manufacturer shall perform all pre-start-up installation inspection, calibrations, alignments, and performance testing as specified in the respective Specification Section. Provide copies of all such test and start-up reports.

12. Certifications.

a. Provide various certifications as required by the specifications. Such certifications shall be signed by an officer (of the firm) or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

b. Certifications may include, but are not limited to:

i Welding certifications and welders qualifications

ii Certifications of Installation, Testing and Training for all equipment

iii Material Testing reports furnished by an independent testing firm



iv Certifications from manufacturer(s) for specified factory testing

v Certifications required to indicate compliance with any sustainability or LEEDS accreditation requirements indicated in the Contract Documents

13. As-Built Drawings: No later than Final Completion, submit a record of all changes during construction– in accordance with specification on As-Built Drawings.

14. Documentation Required By Others.

a. Submittals required by laws, regulations and governing agencies.

i. Prepare and submit all documentation required by state or local law, regulation or government agency directly to the applicable agency. This includes, but is not limited to, notifications, reports, certifications, certified payroll (for projects subject to wage requirements) and other documentation required to satisfy all requirements. Provide to Engineer one copy of each submittal made in accordance with this paragraph.

15. Warranties and Bonds: Assemble a booklet or binder of all warranties and bonds as specified in the various technical specifications and in accordance with the specification on Warranties and Bonds; and provide two originals to the Engineer.

16. Contract Close-Out Documents: Submit Contract documentation as indicated in the specification for Contract Closeout.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED).

PART 3 EXECUTION.

3.01 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE.

A. Provide an initial submittal schedule for review by the Engineer. Incorporate comments from Engineer into a revised submittal schedule.

B. Maintain the submittal schedule and provide sufficient copies for review by Engineer. An up-to-date submittal schedule shall be provided at each project progress meeting.

3.02 TRANSMITTALS

A. Prepare separate transmittal sheets for each submittal. Each transmittal sheet shall include at least the following: the Contractor's name and address, Engineer's name, project name, project number, submittal number, description of submittal and number of copies submitted.

B. Submittals shall be imported into the City of Shreveport Unifier system by the Contractor, as indicated in the Contract Documents or as otherwise directed by the Engineer.

C. All transmittals, forms, cover letters, attachments, and related documents will be processed through the Unifier system based on a pre-established categorized system.

3.03 PROCEDURES

A. Action Submittals

1. Contractor's Responsibilities



a. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work of other related Sections, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required). Coordinate with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar sequenced activities. Extensions to the Contract Time will not be approved for the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.

b. The submittals of all shop drawings (including working drawings and product data) shall be sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to allow for possible need of re-submittals, including the specified review time for the Engineer.

c. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each submittal for shop drawings and O&M manuals that require review by more than one engineering discipline. Resubmittals will be subject to the same review.

d. Submittals of operation and maintenance data shall be provided within 30 days of approval of the related shop drawing(s).

e. Before submission to the Engineer, review shop drawings as follows:

i. make corrections and add field measurements, as required

ii. use any color for its notations except red (reserved for the Engineer's notations) and black (to be able to distinguish notations on black and white documents)

iii. identify and describe each and every deviation or variation from Contract documents or from previous submissions, except those specifically resulting from a comment from the Engineer on a previous submission

iv. include the required Contractor's Certification statement

v. provide field measurements (as needed)

vi. coordinate with other submittals

vii. indicate relationships to other features of the Work

viii. highlight information applicable to the Work and/or delete information not applicable to the Work

f. If Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, provide written notice thereof to the Engineer immediately; and do not release for manufacture before such notice has been received by the Engineer.

g. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, carry out the construction in accordance therewith; and make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the Engineer.

2. Engineer’s Responsibilities

a. Engineer will not review shop drawings (including working drawings and product data) that do not include the Contractor's approval stamp and required



certification statement. Such submittals will be returned to the Contractor, without action, for correction.

b. Partial shop drawings (including working drawings and product data) will not be reviewed. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a submittal is incomplete, that submittal will be returned to the Contractor for completion. Such submittals may be returned with comments from Engineer indicating the deficiencies requiring correction.

c. If shop drawings (including working drawings and product data) meet the submittal requirements, Engineer will forward copies to appropriate reviewer(s). Otherwise, noncompliant submittals will be returned to the Contractor without action - with the Engineer retaining one copy.

d. Submittals which are transmitted in accordance with the specified requirements will be reviewed by the Engineer within 10 days. The time for review will commence upon receipt of submittal by Engineer.

3. Review of Shop Drawings (Including Working Drawings and Product Data) and Samples

a. The review of shop drawings, working drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed:

i. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements

ii. as relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials

iii. as approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as otherwise provided herein

b. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner.

c. If the shop drawings (including working drawings and product data) or samples as submitted describe variations and indicate a deviation from the Contract requirements that, in the opinion of the Engineer are in the interest of the City and are so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception.

d. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "RED" in marking submittals.

e. Shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor with one of the following codes.

1. "APPROVED" – This code is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor may release the material for manufacture.

2. "APPROVED AS NOTED" - This code is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments IS NOT required. The Contractor may release the material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product.



3. "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM" - This combination of codes is assigned when a written confirmation of the notations and comments is required. The Contractor may release the material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. Written confirmation shall specifically address each notation and comment. Confirmation shall be furnished to the Engineer within 10 days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the confirmation.

4. "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT" - This combination of codes is assigned when a written confirmation of the notations and comments is required and are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the entire package. This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. Resubmittal shall be furnished to the Engineer within 10 days of the date of the Engineer's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.

5. "NOT APPROVED" – This code is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the contract documents. The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor.

6. “COMMENTS ATTACHED” – This code is assigned where there are comments attached to the returned submittal, which provide additional information to aid the Contractor.

7. "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED (Not subject to Engineer's Review or Approval)" – This code is assigned to acknowledge receipt of a submittal that is not subject to the Engineer's review and approval, and is being filed for informational purposes only. This code is generally used in acknowledging receipt of means and methods of construction work plans, field conformance test reports, and health and safety plans.

f. Repetitive Reviews: Shop drawings, O&M manuals and other submittals will be reviewed no more than 2 times at the City's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at the Contractor's expense. Reimburse the City for all costs invoiced by Engineer for the third and subsequent reviews.

g. Electronic Transmission: Action Submittals shall be transmitted by electronic means, meeting the following conditions:

i. The above-specified transmittal form is included.

ii. All other requirements specified above have been met including, but not limited to, coordination by the Contractor, review and approval by the Contactor, and the Contractor's Certification.

iii. The submittal contains no pages or sheets larger than 11 x 17 inches.

iv. With the exception of the transmittal sheet, the entire submittal is included in a single file.

v. The electronic files are PDF format (with printing enabled).

B. Informational Submittals



1. Contractor's Responsibilities

a. Number of copies: Submit 4 copies, unless otherwise indicated in individual Specification sections

2. Engineer’s Responsibilities

a. The Engineer will review each informational submittal within 10 days. If the informational submittal complies with the Contract requirements, Engineer will file for the project record. Engineer may elect not to respond to Contractor regarding informational submittals meeting the Contract requirements.

b. If an informational submittal does not comply with the Contract requirements, Engineer will respond accordingly to the Contractor within 10 days. Thereafter, the Contractor shall perform the required corrective action, including retesting, if needed, until the submittal, in the opinion of the Engineer, is in conformance with the Contract Documents.

3. Electronic Transmission

a. Informational submittals shall be transmitted by electronic means meeting all of the following conditions:

i. The above-specified transmittal form is included.

ii. With the exception of the transmittal sheet, the entire submittal is included in a single file.

iii. The electronic files are PDF format (with printing enabled).

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for review, a schedule that clearly shows the sequence and interdependencies of activities required for complete performance of the work required for this project, showing the order in which the Contractor and his Subcontractors propose to carry on the Work, and the dates upon which he proposes to start and complete the entire scope of work, including the dates for submittals and approval of samples and shop drawings, and the procurement of materials, plant, and equipment. The construction schedule shall consist of a critical path method (CPM) network presented in a time-scaled graphic (print-out).

B. The construction schedule shall, in general, determine the order in which the Work is to proceed. The Engineer shall review the Contractor’s approach to meet the specific requirements.

C. The Contractor will be responsible for coordinating his own schedule as well as construction activities of others directed by his Subcontractors. The schedule shall include activities to be performed by Subcontractors and will demonstrate the coordination of their work. The contractor will maintain the overall project construction schedule, of which the Sub-contractor’s construction schedule will be a part.

D. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient forces, construction equipment as may be necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the submitted schedule.

E. The Contractor shall designate the individual or an authorized representative who shall be responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and reports. This individual or representative of the Contractor shall have direct project control and complete authority for updating and maintaining the Contractor’s schedule.

F. Contract Time on a Working Day Basis or a Calendar Day Basis extends from the date of Notice to Proceed through the date of Final Completion. All Work, including activities such as testing, startup, training, 30-day performance tests, O&M Manuals, warranties, As-Built Drawings, etc. must be completed within the Contract Time. All Work shall be identified in the baseline schedule to be completed within the Contract Time.

G. If the latest version of Oracle Primavera P6 or Microsoft Project are not being used, Contractor will submit the qualifications of the scheduling software being proposed as an alternative. Engineer will review the alternative for use on the project.



1.02 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES

A. The schedule shall be organized by Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)

B. Each Construction Activity’s duration will be no more than four weeks. Level of Effort (LOE) and procurement activities may have durations that are longer.

C. Specifically identify activities for the following list of structures or items, in addition to other structures or items as necessary.

1. Site clearing.

2. Site utilities.

3. Material installations.

4. Finishings.

5. Testing.

6. Startup.

7. Pipe installation.

8. Boring and jacking.

9. Restoration.

D. Include and explain the approach to allow for adverse weather interruptions that are normal for the project location. Normal weather shall mean seasonally average weather conditions, as recorded by NOAA.

E. The default calendar used shall be an 8 hour day 5 days a week (40 hour week) including City Holidays. Alternative calendars will be only used after explained and accepted by the Engineer.

F. Include plan for all long lead items and materials.

1.03 FORMAT OF SCHEDULES

A. Prepare CPM schedules in the form of a Time Scale Logic Diagram (TSLD) including the following:

1. Show each activity within each WBS or item.

2. Include columns of information for:

a. Activity ID.

b. Activity Description.

c. Original Duration.

d. Early Start and Finish.

e. Late Start and Finish.

f. Total Float.

3. Include a horizontal time scale: At minimum, by year and month from the start of Contract



Time.

4. Use no font smaller than 10 points.

5. Sheet size: 11 inches x 17 inches, 1 sided, color

B. TSLD should be sorted by WBS, Item, and Early Start

1.04 SUBMITTAL TYPES DEFINED:

A. Interim Schedule showing the planned activities for the first 60 days of the project will be submitted and discussed at the Pre-Construction Meeting.

B. Preliminary Baseline Schedule will be submitted within 14 days after notice-to-proceed (NTP). The Engineer will review and comment within 2 weeks for incorporation in Baseline Submittal.

C. Accepted Baseline (also known as “as-planned”) CPM schedule will incorporate the Engineer review comments and be submitted within 2 weeks of receipt of those comments.

D. Once the Baseline Schedule has been submitted and approved, revised monthly progress schedules and updated monthly narrative reports including graphics, reports, and narratives, will be submitted.

1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Narrative Report shall consist of a written report providing an overview of the schedule, specific to each submittal. The Narrative Reports for developmental submittals, e.g. Interim and Preliminary, shall describe the Contractor’s approach to executing the Work. The updated Narrative Reports provided with Monthly Status Reports shall include the items specified in Paragraph 1.06.

B. The Narrative for the Baseline Schedule shall:

1. Explain key activities and assumptions on which the schedule is based.

2. Describe the Critical Path.

3. Discuss key deliveries that might adversely affect the project schedule.

4. Explain the Contractor’s approach to adverse weather interruptions.

5. Time constraints should be kept to a minimum and the use of any time constraints must be explained why they were used or required.

C. The following report is required for Baseline Submittal, with both hardcopy and PDF required to be submitted to the Engineer.

1. Total Float – a report listing all activities, sorted by Total Float (ascending from low to high).

1.06 PROGRESS REVISIONS

A. The construction schedule shall be kept up-to-date and the current updated schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer monthly. If the Contractor fails to submit the required updated schedule by the 10th day of the month, the Engineer may withhold a portion of payment until such time as the Contractor submits the required updated schedule.

B. Include the Physical Percent Complete – the Contractor’s estimated physical percent



complete for each activity as of the data date for the respective report.

C. Each month, indicate progress of each activity to data date of submission.

D. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule:

1. Major changes in scope.

2. Activities modified since previous submission.

3. Revised projections of progress and completion.

4. Other identifiable changes.

E. Provide an updated Narrative Report with each monthly status report describing:

1. Any changes to the critical path subsequent to the previous status report

2. Any changes to the CPM relationships

3. Loss or gain in the Total Float, with explanation of the main cause of such loss or gain (Variance Report)

4. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule.

5. Remedial actions or recovery steps that will be employed to arrest and/or recover from delays

6. Schedule presentation of Look Back over update period and Look Ahead to next 2 update cycles.

7. Schedule report showing variance to Baseline.

8. Provide a list of all activities added, deleted, or modified since the last update


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE

A. The Contractor agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly schedule that delays to the critical path have resulted, and hence, that the contract completion date will not be met or when so directed by the Engineer, he will take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the City, submitting to the Engineer for approval, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule.

1. Increased construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Engineer, any delays to critical path or construction completion.

2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the Engineer, any delays to critical path or construction completion.

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of



activities, and comply with the revised schedule to eliminate delays to the Critical Path and construction completion date.

3.02 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION TIME

A. If the Contractor desires to make changes which affect the approved schedule, he shall notify the Engineer in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the Engineer takes no exception to these changes, the Contractor shall revise, without additional cost to the City, all of the affected portion of the schedule.

B. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Engineer may deem necessary for a determination as to whether the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of this contract. Engineer will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date under the provisions of this contract, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the currently approved schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities which, according to the schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the schedule do not have any effect on the contract completion date or dates, and therefore, will not be the basis for a change therein.

C. From time to time, it may be necessary for the contract schedule and/or completion time to be adjusted to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the City or its representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the Contractor shall reschedule the work and/or contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions, and shall revise its schedule accordingly. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available float time in the schedule may be used by the City, as well as by the Contractor. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the early start date, and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, of any of the activities in the schedule.

D. Total Float in the approved CPM network is for the mutual benefit of the Project, i.e. either the City or the Contractor may take advantage of available Total Float. Therefore, without obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set out in the schedule, the City may initiate changes to the Work that absorb float time. Contractor-initiated changes that reduce the project total float time identified in the approved schedule may be accomplished with the Engineer's concurrence.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4322

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 GENERAL.

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide photographic documentation of the Project as specified herein.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.

2. Preconstruction video recordings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For videographer

B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Include same information as corre-sponding photographic documentation.

C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within 14 days of taking photographs.

1. File Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

2. Submit digital photographs in data disc format acceptable to Engineer.

a. Full-size (12-cm / 4.7-inch diameter) CD-R, DVD-R and DVD+R single-use record-able discs are acceptable.

b. No other disc types (including but not limited to CD-RW, DVD-RW, or any 8-cm / 3.1-inch diameter Mini CD or DVD) or storage media (including but not limited to USB drives) will be accepted.

c. Package each disc in a hard plastic case, clearly and indelibly labeled using self-ad-hesive labels specifically designed for labeling of discs. Include on the label the pro-ject name and the time period covered by the photographs contained on the disc.

d. Transmittal of image files by electronic mail is unacceptable.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and contact information for photographer.

c. Name of Contractor.

d. Date and time photograph was taken.



e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

f. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

D. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within 14 days of recording.

1. Submit video recordings in digital video disc format acceptable to Engineer.

a. Full-size (12-cm / 4.7-inch diameter) CD-R, DVD-R and DVD+R single-use record-able discs are acceptable.

b. No other disc types (including but not limited to CD-RW, DVD-RW, or any 8-cm / 3.1-inch diameter Mini CD or DVD) or storage media (including but not limited to USB drives) will be accepted.

c. Package each disc in a hard plastic case, clearly and indelibly labeled using self-ad-hesive labels specifically designed for labeling of discs. Include on the label the pro-ject name and the time period covered by the video recordings contained on the disc.

2. Identification: With each submittal, provide the following information:

a. Name of Project.

b. Name and contact information for videographer.

c. Name of Contractor.

d. Date video recording was recorded.

e. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), el-evation or story of construction.

f. Weather conditions at time of recording.

3. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page.

1.04.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Videographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional videographer of construction projects for not less than three years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Photographs:

1. Provide digital photographs produced by a dedicated, fixed- or interchangeable-lens digital camera. Images made with cell phones, tablets, webcams, and wearable cam-eras are not acceptable.



2. Digital Camera: Have a minimum image resolution of 15 megapixels, and produce images in JPEG (.JPG) format with image dimensions of not less than [3200 by 2400] pixels.

B. Digital Video Recordings:

1. Provide video recordings made with a dedicated digital video camera specifically made for video recordings. Video recordings made with cell phones, tablets, webcams, and wearable cameras are not acceptable.

2. Digital Video Camera: Have a minimum resolution of 720p (1280 x 720, progressive).

3. Provide video recordings in a common digital video format such as .MP4 or .WMV. The minimum resolution of all video files shall be 720p (1280 x 720, progressive). Submit video files on a digital video disc in format acceptable to Engineer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs that clearly show the Work. Exhibit correct exposure and focus, accurate color balance, maximum depth of field, minimal optical distortion, and minimal noise. Photographs that, in the Engineer’s opinion, do not meet these quality criteria will not be accepted and shall be re-taken at no additional cost to the City.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each pho-tographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points.

1. Flag construction limits before taking preconstruction photographs.

2. Take a minimum of 66 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.

3. Take additional photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.

4. Take additional photographs as necessary to record any known or apparent defects existing on the site including settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.

3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS.

A. Videographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record preconstruction video.

B. Video Recordings:



1. Produce bright, clear, sharp pictures with accurate colors and free from distortion, excessive shake, or any other form of picture imperfection. The audio track of each video recording shall reproduce precise and concise explanatory notes by the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and freedom from distortion and interference. Video recordings that, in the Engineer’s opinion, do not meet these quality criteria will not be accepted and shall be re-recorded at no additional cost to the City.

2. Mount camera on tripod before starting recording unless otherwise necessary to show area of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual temperature reading at Project site.

C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by dubbing audio narration off-site after video is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. At each change in location, describe vantage point, location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording.

2. Begin each video recording with name of Project, Contractor's name, videographer's name, and Project location.

D. Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from video recording opposite the corresponding narration segment.

E. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting construction, record video of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Engineer.

1. Show existing conditions adjacent to Project site before starting the Work.

2. Show existing buildings either on or adjoining Project site to accurately record physical conditions at the start of construction.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4370

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED.

A. Submit a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, as specified in Section 4300. Provide a Schedule of Values for each lift station site as listed in Section 4025.

B. Upon request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness.

C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Pay Estimates.

1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES.

A. Type schedule on an 8-1/2-in by 11-in white paper. Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by the Engineer upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with:

1. Title of Project and location.

2. Project number.

3. Name and Address of Contractor.

4. Contract designation.

5. Date of submission.

B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

C. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item.

D. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

E. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Amount.


PART 3 EXECUTIONS (NOT USED).

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4400

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section includes requirements of a general nature related to the Contractor's responsibility for quality control involving inspections, tests, certifications, and reports. Refer to Section 4410 Testing and Testing Laboratory Services for additional requirements related to quality control.

B. Unless otherwise indicated in the Specifications, only new materials shall be incorporated in the Work. All materials furnished by the Contractor to be incorporated in the Work shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be processed for, or delivered to the Site without prior approval by the Engineer.

1.02 INSPECTIONS

A. The Engineer shall have the right to inspect all materials at all stages of collection and processing, and shall be allowed access to the site and to the Contractor's and supplier's facilities to conduct such inspections. Onsite work shall be subject to continuous inspection. Inspection by the Engineer shall not release the Contractor from responsibility or liability with respect to material.

B. When local codes or laws require approval and inspection of the work by other agencies or organizations the Contractor shall obtain such approval and submit one signed original and three copies of the approval to the City.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE – CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall monitor quality control over suppliers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. The Contractor shall comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions where Work is to be performed and notify the Engineer of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected by the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

D. The Contractor shall request clarification from Engineer if manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, and shall not proceed with the affected Work before receiving clarification.

E. The Contractor shall comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

F. Work shall be performed by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.

1.04 REFERENCES.



A. The Contractor shall comply with the reference specifications and standards at a minimum.

B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

C. The Contractor shall be familiar with applicable standards, and shall obtain copies of these standards where required by product specification sections.

D. The contractual relationship, duties, and responsibilities of the parties in Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or influence otherwise in any reference document.

1.05 REPORTS.

A. The Contractor may, in lieu of the specified tests and at the option of the Engineer, submit for review a Certificate of Compliance in the form of a letter from the manufacturer. The Certificate shall state the following:

1. Manufacturer has performed all required tests.

2. Materials supplied meet all test requirements.

3. Tests were performed within six months of submittal of the Certificate.

4. Materials that were tested are the same type, quality, manufacture, and make as those specified.

5. Include identification of the materials.


PART 3 EXECUTIONS (NOT USED).

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4410

TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of this section are related to a testing laboratory provided by the City. The City will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory (Laboratory) in accordance with the requirements of Standard Specification Section 106.6. Employment of the Laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.

B. Cooperate with the Laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall employ and pay for an independent testing laboratory where specified in other sections.

1.03 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY

A. Laboratory is not authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Approve or accept any portion of the work.

3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.

1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with Laboratory personnel, provide access to Work and to manufacturer's operations.

B. Secure and deliver to the Laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed for use in the Work and which require testing.

C. Provide to the Laboratory the proposed mix designs for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic cement concrete, flowable fill and other materials which require control by the Laboratory.

D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of Work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. Standard requirements for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the



Contractor, and no extra charge to the City shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification.

E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to work to be tested.

2. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested.

3. To facilitate inspections and tests.

4. For storage and curing of test samples.

F. Notify the Resident Project Representative at least 48 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse City for Laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence.

G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required for the Contractor's convenience.



END OF SECTION



SECTION 4562

DUST CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Perform dust control operations, in an approved manner, whenever necessary or when directed by the City, even though other work on the project may be suspended.

B. Dust control shall be generally accomplished by cleaning, sweeping, and sprinkling with water. The use of water resulting in mud will not be permitted as a substitute for sweeping or other methods. Calcium chloride may be used when necessary to control dust nuisance.

C. Methods of controlling dust shall meet all air pollutant standards as set forth by Federal and State regulatory agencies.

D. Dust control is incidental to the project. There will be no separate pay for dust control.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Calcium chloride shall conform to AASHTO M144, Type I except the requirements for "total alkali chlorides" and other impurities shall not apply.

2.02 SWEEPING EQUIPMENT

A. When identified in the contract documents, furnish[Furnish and operate] a self-loading motor sweeper with spray nozzles at least once each working day to keep paved areas acceptably clean wherever construction, including restoration, is incomplete.

PART 3 EXECUTIONS

3.01 MAINTENANCE

A. Abate dust nuisance throughout all phases of construction until final acceptance of the Project.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4580

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide and maintain a Contractor Sign.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit details of Contractor Sign in accordance with the requirements of Section 4300. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering if used.

1.03 CONTRACTOR SIGN

A. Provide one (1) double-sided sign, at location as directed by the Engineer.

B. Construct sign with new materials in accordance with detail shown on the Drawings. Maintain sign to present a clean and neat appearance throughout the Project duration.

C. Sign shall be painted and lettered by an experienced professional in the type of work required.

D. Payment for furnishing and maintaining Contractor Sign shall be included in Mobilization (no direct payment).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONTRACTOR SIGN MATERIALS

A. Sign Posts: 4”X 4” pressure treated wood posts, 12 feet long (minimum) for in-ground mounting.

B. Fasteners shall be galvanized steel. Attach sign to posts with ½”X 5-1/2” button head carriage bolts and secure with nuts and washers. Cover button heads with reflective film or coating to match the sign background.

C. Sign: 4’X 8’ X ¾” exterior B-C plywood. Do not piece plywood sheets to fabricate a sign face.

D. Coating: White industrial grade, fast-drying, oil-based paint with gloss sheen for posts and sign. Paint both sides and all edges of sign prior to adding adhesive applications.

E. Sign Background: Reflective white 3M Scotchlite Engineer Grade, Pressure Sensitive Sheeting (White) or equal

F. Lettering: 3M Scotchcal Pressure Sensitive Films (Black), or equal, for lettering.

G. City will furnish an electronic City Seal for use by the Contractor.

2.02 CONTRACTOR SIGN LAYOUT

A. Lettering Style, Size, and Spacing: Helvetica Regular.

B. Condensed style text may be utilized if necessary to maintain sign composition.



PART 3 EXECUTIONS

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install Contractor Sign(s) prior to mobilization, at locations shown on the Drawings unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Position each sign so it is fully visible and readable to the general public.

B. Install signs level and plumb. Sink posts 3 feet to 4 feet below grade and stabilize posts to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above grade for mounting sign.

3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL

A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair deterioration and damages to structure, framing and sign.

B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of at least 2 feet below grade upon completion of the Project. Restore area to a condition better than or equal to the existing condition prior to construction.

END OF SECTION

(Sign detail follows)



SECTION 4600

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery, handling, storage and protection for all items required in the construction of the Work. Specific requirements, if any, are specified with the related item.

B. Refer to Section 106 for general provisions related to storage and handling of materials.

C. Refer to Section 108 for general provisions related to storage of equipment and materials in streets.

D. Refer to Section 2000 and Section 3000 for specific requirements related to stringing pipe materials at the Site.

1.02 TRANSPORTATION AND DELIVERY

A. Transport and handle items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Coordinate delivery from Suppliers with construction schedule to ensure minimum holding time for items that are hazardous, flammable, easily damaged or sensitive to deterioration.

C. Deliver products in manufacturer's original sealed containers or other packing systems, complete with instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

D. Provide necessary equipment and personnel to unload and handle all items and materials.

E. Promptly inspect shipment to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and items are undamaged.

F. If any item has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired at no additional cost to the City.

1.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store items and materials at an offsite laydown area until they are ready for delivery to the Site. Coordinate delivery to the Site with the installation schedule.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Storage instruction shall be studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Engineer. Carefully follow storage instructions and maintain written documentation of compliance. Arrange storage to permit access for inspection.

C. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

D. All paint and other coating products shall be stored in areas protected from the weather. Follow all storage requirements set forth by the paint and coating manufacturers.



1.04 STORAGE AT THE SITE

A. All items and materials delivered to the Site shall be unloaded and placed in a manner which will not hamper the Contractor’s normal construction operation or those of subcontractors and other contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic.

B. Unless otherwise specified in separate sections, items and materials may not be stored at the Site for more than 5 days without specific approval from the Engineer.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4630

SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. The requirements of this Section apply to proposed Substitute Items. If in the sole discretion of the Engineer an item of material or equipment proposed by the Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, it will be considered a proposed Substitute Item. This Section includes supplementary requirements to those in the General Provisions.

B. The requirements of this Section do not apply to potential Suppliers or Bidders. Proposed Substitute Items will be accepted only from the Contractor.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. In order for proposed Substitute Items to be considered, the Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of Notice to Proceed, complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of all proposed Substitute Items identified on the list. Proposed substitutions will not be considered unless the Contractor provides all of the required information within the 30 day period.

B. Furnish a separate submittal for each proposed Substitute Item. Each submittal shall include the following information.

1. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed Substitute Item with requirements stated in Contract Documents:

a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.

b. Manufacturer’s literature; identify:

i Product description.

ii Reference standards.

iii Performance and test data.

iv Operation and maintenance data.

c. Samples, as applicable.

d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date of each installation.

2. Itemized comparison of the proposed Substitute Item with product specified. List significant variations. Substitution shall not change design intent and shall perform equal to that specified.

3. Data relating to impact on construction schedule occasioned by the proposed substitution.

4. Any effect of substitution on separate contracts.

5. List of changes required in other work or products.



6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified.

a. Amount of any net change to Contract Amount.

7. Designation of required license fees or royalties.

8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials.

1.04 EVALUATION OF PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE ITEMS

A. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a

2. They are requested directly by a Subcontractor or Supplier.

3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

B. Requests for substitutions which are not included on the list of proposed Substitute Items will not be considered unless evidence is submitted to the City that all of the following circumstances exist:

1. The specified product is unavailable for reasons beyond the control of the Contractor. Such reasons shall consist of strikes, bankruptcy, discontinuance of manufacturer, or acts of God.

2. The Contractor placed, or attempted to place, orders for specified products within 30 days after Notice to Proceed

3. Request for substitution is made in writing to the Engineer within 10 days of the date on which the Contractor ascertains that it cannot obtain the specified item.

4. Complete data as set forth herein to permit complete analysis of the proposed substitution is submitted with the request.

C. The Engineer’s decision regarding evaluation of substitutions shall be considered final and binding. Requests for time extensions and additional costs based on submission of, acceptance of, or rejection of substitutions will not be allowed. All approved substitutions will be incorporated into the Contract by Change Order.

1.06 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION

A. In making formal request for substitution, Contractor represents that:

1. It has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to that specified.

2. It will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified.

3. It will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

4. It waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent.

5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his/her Contract, but not:

a. Costs under separate contracts.



b. City's costs for redesign or revision of Contract Documents.

1.07 ENGINEER DUTIES

A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

B. Notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.



END OF SECTION

100% CONTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


SECTION 4700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies administrative, verification and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to:

1. Final cleaning (Section 4710).

2. As-Built Construction Schedule (Section 4310).

3. As-Built Drawings (Section 4720).

4. Warranties, guarantees, and bonds (Section 4740).

5. Spare parts and maintenance materials (as specified).

6. Reconciliation of final accounting and summary change order.

7. Final releases or waivers buildings, wells, utilities and railroads.

8. Letter of Final Completion.

9. Final Acceptance and Payment.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Completion (Standard Specification Section 110.12).

B. Acceptance and Final Payment (Standard Specification Section 111.8).

1.03 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Complete all Work, correct all deficiencies, and furnish all deliverables as specified, prior to Final Completion. The following list is not intended to be comprehensive but includes examples of services and documentation which are part of the Work.

1. Field services by material suppliers and manufacturers

2. Initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing

3. Startup and performance demonstration

4. Operating and maintenance instructions and manuals

5. Vendor training/instructions to City personnel

6. Online training services

7. Spare parts and maintenance materials

100% CONTRUCTION DOCUMENTS


8. As-Built Drawings

9. As-Built Construction Schedule

10. Warranties, guarantees, and bonds

11. Final cleaning and site restoration

12. Removal of project signs, temporary traffic control devices, and temporary facilities

13. Establish permanent erosion control and remove temporary erosion control items

B. Furnish submittals to Engineer that are required by governing or other authorities having applicable jurisdiction including but not limited to permit close out information, certificates of occupancy, etc.

C. When the Contractor determines that the Work is complete, it shall notify the City Engineer in writing that the Work will be ready for final inspection on a definite date. The notice shall bear the signed concurrence of the Engineer having charge of inspection and construction and shall be given at least 10 days prior to the date stated for final inspection. If the City determines that the Work is as represented, it will make arrangements to have final inspection commenced on the date stated or as soon thereafter as practical.

D. If the final inspection discloses any Work as being unsatisfactory, the Engineer will give the Contractor the necessary instructions for correction. Upon correction of the Work, another inspection will be made, and will constitute the final inspection if the Work has been satisfactorily completed.

E. When the Work is found to be complete, the City will notify the Contractor and issue a Letter of Final Completion. The Contractor shall record the Letter of Final Completion with the Clerk of Court in Caddo Parish no later than 45 days after the date of Final Completion. The recording date begins the “45 day lien free period” which is the last 45 days during which anyone may file a lien against the contract.

F. The date of Final Completion is the end of accrual of Contract Time and Liquidated Damages. The following date is the beginning of time for warranties, guarantees, and the maintenance and repair period.

1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT

A. If necessary to reconcile estimated and actual quantities of Contract Items, the City will prepare and execute a summary change order.

B. Contractor shall furnish all releases or waivers on buildings, wells, utilities, and railroads, as well as any maintenance bonds, certificates from the Health Department, tracings, brochures, or other items required by the Contract before Final Payment.

C. The City will acknowledge Final Acceptance of the Work and make final payment to the Contractor within 45 days following receipt of a clear lien certificate.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4710

CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Maintain the Site clean and free from rubbish and debris, including existing rubbish and debris identified in the Contract Documents to be removed. Execute cleaning of components of the Work during construction until final completion of the Project. No direct payment will be made for Work specified in this Section.

1.02 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING

A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti-pollution laws.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.

B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of surface material to be cleaned.

C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by manufacturer of the cleaning material.

D. Earth dams will not be permitted at catch basin openings, local depressions, or elsewhere, except in time of emergency. Temporary dams of sand bags, asphaltic concrete, or other acceptable material may be permitted when necessary to protect the Work, provided their use does not create a hazard or nuisance to the public. Such dams shall be removed from the Site as soon as their use is no longer necessary.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION

A. Remove all existing waste material, rubbish and windblown debris identified in the contract documents from the work site prior to construction.

3.02 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the Work, the Site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.

C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the Site.

D. Remove materials and equipment from the Site as soon as they are no longer necessary.



E. Remove excess materials from excavation of catch basins and similar structures immediately. Sufficient materials which meet the specified requirements for backfill may remain.

F. Remove forms and form lumber from the Site as soon as practicable.

3.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning.

B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight-exposed exterior surfaces.

C. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.

D. Prior to final completion or City occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight-exposed exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the entire Work is clean.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4720

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. The Contractor shall keep and maintain, at the job site, a copy of the Drawings, marked up and annotated to indicate all changes made during the course of a project, as specified herein.

B. The Contractor shall keep and maintain, at the job site, a copy of Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams for control systems, marked up and annotated to indicate all changes made during the course of a project, as specified herein.


A. Contractor shall maintain an as-built copy of the following documents, marked up to indicate all changes made during the course of a project:

B. Measure and record coordinates representing the horizontal and vertical locations of all buried pressure pipelines 4 inches in diameter or larger. Measure horizontal and vertical locations of all fittings, valves, manholes and changes in horizontal direction and record the coordinates that these locations represent.

C. Measure and record coordinates based on the Louisiana Coordinate System of 1983 North Zone. Measure and record elevations in Mean Sea Level datum.

D. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. The Contractor shall annotate (mark-up) the Drawings to indicate all project conditions, locations, configurations, and any other changes or deviations that vary from the original Drawings. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, buried or concealed construction, and utility features that are revealed during the course of construction. Special attention shall be given to recording the locations (horizontal and vertical) and material of all buried utilities that are encountered during construction – whether or not they were indicated on the Drawings. The as-built information added to the drawings may be supplemented by detailed sketches, if necessary, clearly indicating, the Work, as constructed.

2. These annotated Drawings constitute the Contractor's As-Built Drawings and are actual representations of as-built conditions, including all revisions made necessary by change orders, design modifications, requests for information and field orders.

3. As-Built Drawings shall be accessible to the Engineer at all times during the construction period.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 MAINTENANCE OF AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Store As-Built Drawings in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files and racks for storage of the As-Built Drawings.



B. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible, condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes.

C. Make documents available for inspection by the Engineer at all times.

3.02 MARKING METHOD

A. Use the color Red (indelible ink) to record information on the Drawings.

B. Label each document "AS-BUILT" in neat large printed letters.

C. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, notations shall be affixed to hardcopies of documents.

D. Record information contemporaneously with construction progress.

E. Legibly mark drawings with as-built information:

1. Elevations and dimensions of structures and structural elements.

2. All underground utilities (piping and electrical), structures, and appurtenances

a. Changes to existing structure, piping and appurtenance locations.

b. Record horizontal and vertical locations of underground structures, piping, utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

c. Record actual installed pipe material, class, size, joint type, etc.

d. Record specific locations of buried pressure pipelines 4 inches in diameter or larger and corners of new, major structures in tabular form. Reference each specific location on the annotated Drawings.

3.03 AS-BUILT INFORMATION COMPILATION

A. Do not conceal any work until the required information is acquired.

B. Items to be recorded include, but are not limited to:

1. Changes made by Field Order or Change Order

2. Clarifications made from RFI’s

3. Details not indicated on the original Drawings

4. Notes regarding liners installed or other trenchless pipeline rehabilitation or repair

5. Coordinates of pipelines, manholes, bends, valves, horizontal changes in direction, and vertical changes in direction.

3.04 SUBMITTAL

A. Prior to Final Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall finalize and deliver a complete set of As-Built Drawings to the Engineer conforming to the construction records of the Contractor. The set of drawings shall consist of corrected and annotated drawings showing the recorded location(s) of the Work. As-Built Drawings shall be in the form of a set of prints with annotations carefully and neatly superimposed on the drawings in red.



B. The information submitted by the Contractor into the As-Built Drawings will be assumed to be correct. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of such information, and shall bear the costs resulting from the correction of incorrect data.

C. Delivery of As-Built Drawings to the Engineer will be a prerequisite to Final Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 4740

WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including manufacturer's standard warranties on products and special warranties.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the City prior to the date fixed by the City for Final Completion. If the Certificate of Final Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Final Completion for the work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties upon request of the Engineer.

B. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied or used by the City, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the City within 15 days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the City for approval prior to final execution.

D. Refer to the General Provisions, Special Conditions for Streets/Drainage and Water/Sewer and individual Technical Specification Sections for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties and bonds.

E. At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Documents.

F. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents and sized to receive 8-1/2-in by 11-in paper.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Contract Documents, with each item identified with the number and title of the Section in which specified and the name of the product or work item.

H. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address and telephone number of the installer, supplier and manufacturer.

I. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or name and the name, address and telephone number of the Contractor.



J. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual.

K. Schedule of Special Warranties

1. General Provision 103.5- Guarantees

L. Maintenance Bond: Furnish a two-year 10 percent maintenance bond as required in Special Conditions for Streets/Storm Drainage and Water/Sewer 5.4.

1.03 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work regardless of whether the City has benefited from use of the work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. City's Recourse: Written warranties made to the City are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the City can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

E. Rejection of Warranties: The City reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the City.

B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the City.


PART 3 EXECUTIONS (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION





TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISIONS 5 & 16





DIVISION 5

METALS



SECTION 5500

MISCELLANEOUS METALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all miscellaneous metal complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 LIST OF ITEMS COVERED BY THIS SECTION

A. Access hatches. B. Aluminum bar baskets, frames and guides. C. Other miscellaneous metals required by the project.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with City of Shreveport Specifications, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:

1. All items included in 1.02 of this Section.

B. Certificates

1. Certify that welders have been qualified under AWS, within the previous 12 months, to perform the welds required under this section.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. AA M31C22A41

a. M31: Mechanical Finish, Fine Satin b. C22: Finish, Medium Matte c. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I

B. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A36 – Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 – Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A53 – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless. 4. ASTM A108 – Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard

Quality. 5. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 6. ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 7. ASTM A167 – Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 8. ASTM A276 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and

Shapes.



9. ASTM A307 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 Psi Tensile Strength.

10. ASTM A325 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

11. ASTM A366 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality.

12. ASTM A500 – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

13. ASTM A501 – Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

14. ASTM A536 – Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 15. ASTM A570 – Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled,

Structural Quality. 16. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 17. ASTM B221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. 18. ASTM B429 – Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and

Tube.

C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

D. American Welding Society (AWS)

1. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code Steel. 2. AWS D1.2 – Structural Welding Code Aluminum

E. Federal Specifications

1. FS-FF-B-575C – Bolts, Hexagonal and Square

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

G. International Building Code (IBC)

H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revisions in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in the Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified.

B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the work of other Sections.

C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable AWS welding code. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1 and welding of aluminum shall conform to AWS D1.2.

1. Do not solder aluminum 2. Pretinnig is not required for lead.

1.06 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING



A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation.

B. Repair items which have become damaged or corroded to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior to incorporating them into the work.

1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site, prior to fabrication of items, to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. The use of manufacturer’s name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.

B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer’s service.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the following standards:

1. Structural steel ASTM A572 2. Structural Plates, Angles, Rods, & Bars ASTM A36 3. Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A500, Grade B 4. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A501 or ASTM A53,

Type E or S, Grade B Schedule 40. Use standard malleable iron fittings, galvanized for exterior work.

5. Steel Sheets ASTM A366 6. Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48, Class 35 7. Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 8. Aluminum Extruded Pipe ASTMB429, Alloy 6063 T6 9. Aluminum Extruded Shapes ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6 10. Aluminum Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6 11. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets, and Structural Shapes

a. Exterior, Submerged or Industrial Use ASTM A167, Type 316 (Type 316L for welded)

b. Interior and Architectural Use ASTM A276, Type 304 12. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers ASTM A276, Type 316 13. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A307, Grade A (hot dip

galvanized nuts and washers) 14. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers ASTM A325 (mechanically

galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50)

a. Elevated Temperature Exposure Type I b. General Application Type I or Type II

15. Galvanizing ASTM A123, Zn w/0.5 percent minimum Ni

16. Galvanizing hardware ASTM A153, Zn w/0.5 percent minimum Ni



2.03 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES

A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 unless otherwise noted.

B. Unless otherwise noted, bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel machine bolts; bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel machines bolts; and bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts.

C. Unless otherwise noted, expansion anchors shall be zinc plated carbon steel wedge type anchors complete with nuts and washers. Type 316 stainless steel, wedge type anchors shall be used where they will be submerged or exposed to the weather or where stainless steel wedge type anchors are required. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least 1-in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Hilti or equal.

D. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be a two-part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring system. Capsules shall contain premeasured amounts of polyester or vinyl ester resin, aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be Hilti, HVA Adhesive Anchor; or equal.

E. Adhesive anchors, for fastening to hollow concrete block or brick shall be a three-part stud, screen and chemical dispenser anchoring system. Adhesive cartridges shall contain premeasured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Anchors shall be Hilti, HIT C-20 System or equal.

F. Automatic end welded headed anchor studs shall be flux ended studs made from cold drawn steel, ASTM A108. Headed anchor studs shall be Nelson or equal.

G. Machine bolts and nuts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-575C. Bolts and Nuts shall be hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and related appurtenances shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.04 ACCESS HATCHES

A. Access hatches shall have single or double leaf doors as indicated by the Drawings and/or as required for the removal of equipment. The doors shall be 1/4-inch aluminum steel diamond pattern plate with welded stiffeners, as necessary, to withstand a live load of 300 lbs/sq ft with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span. Hatches shall have a 1/4-in aluminum channel frame with a perimeter anchor flange or strap anchors for concrete embedment around the perimeter. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, use pivot torsion bars for counterbalance or spring operators for easy operation along with automatic door hold open. Hardware shall be durable and corrosion resistant with Type 316 stainless steel hardware used throughout. Provide removable lock handle. Finish shall be the factory mill finish for aluminum doors and frames with bituminous coating on the exterior of the frames in contact with concrete. Access hatches shall be Types as indicated on the Drawings by Halliday Products of Orlando, FL or prior approved equal.

2.05 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM

A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply, defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth



and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.

B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical.

Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Welding shall be on the unexposed side as much as possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration of the aluminum exposed surface. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL

A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.

B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work or other trades.

C. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves, lifting attachments and other functions shall be Schedule 40 pipe unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Wall and floor sleeves, of steel pipe, shall have welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length.

D. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter and shall be given one shop coat of primer compatible with the finish coat after fabrication but before shipment. Paint shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open spaces.

E. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc proves after fabrication. Coating shall be not less than 2 oz/sq ft of surface.

2.07 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL

A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength and durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.

B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up immediately after erection. Areas left unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding.

B. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and repaired after installation. The damage area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zine coating removed prior to painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with two coats of zin oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military Specifications MIL-P-15145. The paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle in the ration of one part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight.

C. Specialty products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Expansion bolts shall be checked for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial installation.

E. Install adhesive capsule anchors using manufacturer’s recommended drive units and adapters and in compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Headed anchor studs shall be welded in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions prior to installation.

H. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of zinc-chromate primer followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar metal.

I. Where aluminum contacts concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved alkali resistant paint to the concrete.

END OF SECTION





DIVISION 16

ELECTRICAL

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PUBLIC LANDING LIFT STATION SHREVEPORT, LOUISIANA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NUMBER TITLE

i

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16135 UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURES

16140 WIRING DEVICES

16267 TELEMETRY CONTROL SYSTEM

16289 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION

16290 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

16491 FUSES

16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

16718 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY


Public Landing Lift Station 16050 -1

SECTION 16050

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Codes and Standards: Where indicated, the referenced edition shall govern. Where not indicated, the latest edition shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.

3. Electricity-metering components.

4. Concrete equipment bases.

5. Control wiring.

6. Electrical demolition.

7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of the Contract Document Specification language constitutes specific definitions for terms found in other Contract Documents, including the Drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of the requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used repetitiously in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this Article.

B. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of the Division 1 Sections. The General Requirements apply to the entire work of the Contract, and where so indicated, to other elements of work which are included in the project.

C. Indicated: The term "Indicated" is a cross reference to details, notes or schedules on the Drawings, other paragraphs or schedules in the Specifications, and similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted,"



"scheduled," and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated," it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate the cross reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

D. Directed, Requested, Etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Engineer," "requested by the Engineer," etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the Engineer's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.

E. Refer: Used to indicate that the subject is defined or specified in further detail at another location in the Contract Documents, or elsewhere as indicated. Except as otherwise noted, "refer" does not imply that the Contractor must purchase or subcontract the subject work in any special manner.

F. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Engineer's response to submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by the Contractor, the meaning of the term "approved" will be held to the limitations of the Engineer's responsibilities and duties as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. In no case will "approval" by the Engineer be interpreted as a release of the Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill the requirements of the Contract Documents.

G. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which the project is to be built.

H. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "furnish" is used to mean supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc., as applicable in each instance.

I. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "install" is used to describe operations of the project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, connecting utilities, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

J. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, the term "provide" means furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use, as applicable in each instance.

K. Installer: The entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in the operations they are engaged to perform.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70 (2014).



1.6 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. Asbestos: No asbestos-containing materials have been identified on items that are indicated to be disturbed. If asbestos-containing materials are encountered, comply with the following:

Upon encountering any previously unidentified materials which he suspects may contain asbestos, the Contractor shall immediately cease all work in the immediate vicinity of the suspected materials and notify the Designer and the Owner. The Owner shall retain consultants to identify the suspected materials. Upon identification, the Owner reserves the right to contract separately for the removal, or require the Contractor to remove said materials in accordance with the following provision. In any case, the work shall be performed by a licensed and certified Abatement Contractor.

The Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (D.E.Q.) has issued the Louisiana Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants. Where asbestos is encountered in a project, the Contractor shall comply with all laws and ordinances pertaining to asbestos handling and abatement, including the latest revision of LAC 33:111, Chapter 25, Subchapter F, Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, LAC 33:111, Chapter 27, Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools and Public Buildings and LAC 33:111, Chapter 51, Subchapter M, Section 5151, Emission Standards for Asbestos. Notification should be addressed to:

Asbestos Coordinator

Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality

Air Quality Division

Post Office Box 82135

Baton Rouge, Louisiana 70884-2135 If the Owner chooses to remove any previously unidentified materials by utilizing different Contractors, the Contractor shall cooperate fully with the Owner's consultants and asbestos abatement Contractor permitting them full access to the project, and shall not resume work in the vicinity of the suspected materials until advised by the Designer and the Owner that it is safe to do so.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. The electrical Plans and Specifications are a portion of the entire project. Other portions of the project contain information and requirements that will affect the electrical work. It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to review all of the Contract Documents and to include those requirements in the bid.

B. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in structures during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.



1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

D. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services.

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Stainless steel, 316.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Stainless steel, 316.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Stainless steel, 316. Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16 inch (14 mm) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured straps, and wall brackets.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

G. Toggle Bolts: Stainless steel springhead type, 316.

H. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

I. Bolts and Washers: Stainless steel, 316.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.

B. Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each cable size.

1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.



C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 3/4 inch wide by 3 mils thick (18 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick).

D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape with the following features:

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick).

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.

E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.

F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. inch (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.

G. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application.

H. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 inch (1 mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the application. 1/4 inch (6 mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

I. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING

A. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.

B. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4x, 316 stainless steel. m

2.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom, but no less than that required by NEC.

B. Clearances: Coordinate with other trades and/or existing conditions to maintain code required clearances above, below and around electrical equipment.

C. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and square to other building or structural systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200 lb (90 kg) design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.

B. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength. Field galvanize galvanized members that have been field cut.

C. Install sleeves for raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for raceway penetrations of masonry walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

D. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry units.



3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.

4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.

5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel. Field Welding: No field welding of supports to structural members will be allowed.

6. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. Do not penetrate outer skin of building from within.

7. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its proof-test load.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout project.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.

E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker.

F. Color-code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Black.

2. Phase B: Red.

3. Phase C: Blue.

G. Color-code 120/240-V three phase system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Black.

2. Phase B: Red.

3. Phase C: Blue.



H. Color-code 120/240-V single phase system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Black.

2. Phase B: Red.

I. Color-code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Brown.

2. Phase B: Orange.

3. Phase C: Yellow.

J. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

K. Install engraved-laminated signs with black letters on white background with minimum 3/8 inch (9 mm) high lettering for equipment designations for switchgear or description of load being fed or controlled in the case of disconnects or contactors.

3.5 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Verify and provide equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.

3.6 ACCESS PANELS

A. Provide access panels as indicated. In addition, provide access panels for each concealed item requiring service or adjustment that would otherwise be inaccessible whether shown or not. Access panel locations shown on Drawings are approximate. Exact location shall be verified with the Architect prior to installation. Deliver access panels to trade responsible for finish surfaces in which access panels are to be installed.

3.7 EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL WIRING

A. Wire in and connect every motor and item of equipment furnished as a part of this contract, including those furnished under other Divisions. Provide all required disconnecting means, boxes, conduit, conductors, etc. Motors and equipment furnished under other Divisions will be installed under that Division.

B. Motor starters and variable speed drives will be furnished under the division that the motors being controlled are furnished, and will be installed under Division 16 by the Electrical Contractor unless controllers are integral to the equipment. Installation includes mounting, connection to power and grounding.



C. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA): All SCADA wiring, other control wiring and interlock wiring is included under the Division that is furnishing the SCADA System.

D. Control Wiring: All control wiring and interlock wiring is included under the Division that is specifying the equipment to be controlled.

3.8 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations not indicated to be removed. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, appearance and functionality.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Existing Work to Remain: Maintain feed, or provide new feed to equipment and devices that are not being removed.

E. Remove demolished material from project site.

F. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.

3.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Electrical power and system interruptions shall be held to a minimum and will be permitted only at times approved by the using agency. The using agency may require that any interruptions be during nights, weekends, holidays, etc. Provide any required overtime work at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Do not interrupt feed to any service, feeder or branch circuit feeding facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to make temporary provisions where required according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.

3. Provide all temporary facilities and services, required to maintain operation, security, and life safety.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.



B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.

3. Electricity-metering components.

4. Concrete bases.

5. Electrical demolition.

6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

7. Touchup painting.

3.12 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint:

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 (2011), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1. Comply with UL 467.

2. Comply with NFPA 70 (2014).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MAUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connections, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. b. Chance/Hubbell



c. Copperweld Corp. d. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group e. Ideal Industries, Inc. f. ILSCO g. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems h. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group i. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell j. Thomas and Betts, Electrical

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section, "Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: Copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Twist-on Connectors: Plastic body with coiled copper alloy wire forming threads.

D. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Underground Mechanical Connectors: Bolted-pressure type or compression type, listed for underground application.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, ¾” dia. By 120” Long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.



C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for all underground connections.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted clamp type or compression connectors for conductors larger than 10 AWG. Use Plastic body twist-on connectors for 10AWG and smaller.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods:

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Electrical Service Grounding Electrode Applications: Install at least three (3) rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes; install in as straight line as conditions permit. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.



C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

F. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

G. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16120

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

2. General Cable Corporation.

3. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

4. Southwire Company.

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7; stranded or solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type N, XHHW2 complying with NEMA WC 5 or 7 as applicable.



2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.

3. Hubbell/Anderson.

4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

6. Ideal

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Push in splice and insulation displacement type connectors shall not be used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance, Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type XHHW2 single conductors in raceway. Minimum size #12 AWG or larger where required for voltage drop. Where branch circuits exceed 100 feet in length, use minimum #10 AWG.

B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type XHHW2, in raceway. Minimum size #14 AWG.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type XHHW2, in raceway or Power-limited cable in raceways. Size as recommended by equipment manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Run all conductors in raceways unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section, "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

E. No more than three current carrying phase conductors (excluding switch legs and grounding conductors), and one grounded conductor, may be installed in any raceway.



3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16130

RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section, "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for supports, anchors, and identification products.

2. Division 16 Section, "Wiring Devices," for devices installed in boxes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

D. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

F. Fixture Whip: Flexible wiring as specified from box to individual lighting fixture.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.






PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

2. Electri-Flex Co.

3. Atkore International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.

4. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.

5. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

6. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

7. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80..5, U.L. 6a. Threaded with threaded fittings.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6. U.L. 1242.

D. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

E. Plastic-Coated IMC and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers:

1. American International.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Arnco Corp.

4. Cantex Inc.

5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

6. Condux International.

7. ElecSYS, Inc.



8. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

9. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

10. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 80 PVC.

C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman.

2. Square D.

B. Material and Construction: 316, Stainless steel, NEMA 4X.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.

6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.



9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

C. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations:

1. Exposed: Rigid Aluminum Conduit.

2. Underground, Single Run: RNC.

3. Underground, Grouped: RNC.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless steel, 316.

6. Exposed Stubbing Up: PVC-coated Rigid Steel Conduit.

B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations:

1. Exposed in Unfinished Areas: Rigid Aluminum Conduit.

2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations, use LFMC.

3. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid Aluminum Conduit.

4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless steel, 316.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21) unless noted. 3/8-inch factory assembled, flexible steel "fixture whips," a maximum of 60 inches long, may be used to feed individual lay-in fluorescent lighting fixtures.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.



1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Do not support electrical equipment or raceways from ceiling grid or ceiling grid supports. Independently support all equipment and raceways directly from structural elements.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section, "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

E. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

F. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

G. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.

2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

I. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

J. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.

K. Terminations:

1. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.



M. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete slab for connection to freestanding equipment. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit.

N. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 12 inches (35 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16135

UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: Handholes and boxes.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Accessories for manholes, handholes, boxes, and other utility structures.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.

2. Reinforcement details.

3. Frame and cover design and handhole frame support rings.

4. Ladder details.

5. Grounding details.

6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps.

7. Joint details.

C. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.


A. Comply with ANSI C2.




1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store precast concrete underground utility structures at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.

B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven (7) days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner’s written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, handholes, and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts entrances into handholes, and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES


1. Carder Concrete Products.

2. Christy Concrete Products.

3. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co.

4. Oldcastle Precast Group.

5. Riverton Concrete Products; a division of Cretex Companies, Inc.

6. Utility Concrete Products, LLC.

7. Utility Vault Co.



8. Wausau Tile, Inc.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

1. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof cast-iron frame, with cast-iron cover with recessed cover hook eyes and tamper-resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts.

2. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

3. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."

4. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom, for small boxes and closed bottom for large boxes unless otherwise indicated.

5. Extensions and Slabs: Designed to mate with bottom of enclosure. Same material as enclosure.

a. Extension shall provide increased depth of 12 inches (300 mm). b. Slab: Same dimensions as bottom of enclosure, and arranged to provide closure.

6. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches (300 mm) vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations.

a. Windows shall be located no less than 6 inches (150 mm) from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls.

b. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks.

c. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

7. Duct Entrances in Handhole Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct.

a. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated. b. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near

interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

8. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long (300 mm wide by 600 mm long) and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test and inspect precast concrete utility structures according to ASTM C 1037.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less:

1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section, "Earthwork," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. Comply with Division 32 Sections, "Lawns and Grasses" and "Exterior Plants."

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 1 Section, "Cutting and Patching."

3.3 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two handholes to drain in both directions.

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1220 mm), both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D. Duct Entrances to Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. for 5-inch (125-mm) ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet (3 m) from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to handhole.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.



E. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

F. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole and Manhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.

2. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, and cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.

D. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors in Concrete Handholes: Do not drill deeper than 2 inches (50 mm) for handholes, for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground utility structures.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.



3.7 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of handholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Duplex receptacles. 2. Ground-fault circuit interrupters. 3. Single- pole switches. 4. Double-pole switches. 5. Device wall plates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 (2014).



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of wiring device):

1. Single Pole Toggle Switch, 120-277V, 20A:

a. Hubbell #HBL1221. b. Leviton #1221-2. c. P & S #20-AC-1.

2. Three-Way Toggle Switch, 120-277V, 20A:

a. Hubbell #HBL1223. b. Leviton #1223-2. c. P & S #20-AC-3.

3. Duplex Receptacle, 125V-1-20A:

a. Hubbell #HBL5362. b. Leviton #5362. c. P & S #5362A.

4. GFCI Receptacles, 125V-1-20A:

a. Hubbell #HBL-GF-5362. b. Leviton #8899. c. P & S #2091-S.

5. Motor Rated Switches and Manual Motor Starters:

a. General Electric CR101 Series. b. Square-D FG or KG Series. c. P & S 78XX Series.

2.2 DEVICE PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 3. Material for Wet Locations: Thermoplastic, with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations." For receptacles, listing shall apply with plug cap inserted.



2.3 FINISHES

A. Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines and structural elements.

3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mount toggle switches at 48 inches above finished floor or grade to center of toggle handle.

B. Mount receptacles, telephone outlets and data outlets 18 inches above finished floor or grade to center of receptacle unless specifically noted otherwise.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 16 Section, "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods".

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section, "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section 16120, "Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Do not connect stranded wire to devices using back wired push-in feature.

E. When terminating stranded conductors on devices, ends of strands shall be contained by insulation so that all strands must be held by screw.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.



2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION


Telemetry Control System 16267 -1

SECTION 16267 – SINGLE PLC CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and the 2015 edition of the City of Shreveport "Standard Specification for Infrastructure Improvements," apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The Contractor shall procure the services of a single Process Control System Supplier (PCSS) to furnish and install all materials, equipment, labor and services, except for those services and materials specifically noted, and required to achieve a fully integrated and operational system as specified herein.

B. Controls for packaged lift stations shall be as specified in the City of Shreveport Standard Specification Section – PACKAGED SUBMERSIBLE LIFT STATION”.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.” 2. Division 16 Section “Conductors and Cables.” 3. Division 16 Section “Grounding and Bonding.” 4. Division 16 Section “Raceways and Boxes.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product include the following:

1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Product description with complete technical data, and product specification sheets. 3. Installation, operation and maintenance instructions including factors affecting

performance. 4. Bill of materials of indicating quantity, manufacturer, and extended model number for

each unique product including the following:

a. Power Supply. b. Voltage Monitor Relay / TVSS. c. Battery/Charger. d. Telemetry Panel Enclosure. e. Temperature Control f. Condensation Heater g. Corrosion Inhibitor



h. Ground Buss/Lugs i. Nameplates j. Ethernet Radio.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. General Requirements:

a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Contractor and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission.

b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches information in each title block.

c. Prepare Drawings using CAD. d. Drawings Size: 22”x34”.

2. Schematic drawings. a. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating

labels for all wiring terminals. b. Graphic sequence of operation.

3. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following:

a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product.

4. System Description:

a. Full description of system architecture, operator interfaces and peripherals, and other devices, and power supplies.

b. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following:

1) Loss of power. 2) Loss of SCADA communication signal. 3) Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. 4) Controller failure. 5) Instrument failure.


A. Minimum 10 years designing, testing, building and installing control panel and/or systems for submersible duplex lift stations. Experience on similar types of control panels other than duplex lift stations will not be considered equivalent.

B. Replacements parts and equipment for the entire control system are to be in stock at all times by more than just one local supplier within 30 miles. Qualified/Certified/Licensed local service personnel trained by the control system manufacturer shall be available at all times to assure prompt assistance to resolve any control system issue on call.



C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in U.L. 698A and 913, and marked for “Enclosed Industrial Control Panel Relating to Hazardous Locations with Intrinsically Safe Circuit Extensions”.

D. Comply with 70 (2014), National Electric Code”.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Two (2) years full warranty on all parts including labor on the entire telemtry system shall be provided. Warranty shall include, but is not limited to, manufacturer’s defects, control system installation and setup.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Manufacturers are listed in this section to establish a standard of quality and performance. Other manufacturers are acceptable subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 POWER SUPPLY

A. 100-240 Volt AC input with 24 DVC output power supply 10 Amp adjustable range from 22.2 volts to 25.4 Volts output. Siemens LOGO power or equivalent.

2.3 VOLTAGE MONITOR RELAY / TVSS

A. Voltage monitoring relay: Phase sequence, phase unbalance, over voltage and under voltage monitoring Siemens 3UG4/3RR2 or equivalent. TVSS Siemens: SPD (Surge Protective Device) Green LED OK Indicator light, TSP 3E03050 Series or equivalent.

2.4 BATTERY/CHARGER

A. 120 Volt AC input with 24 Volt DC output battery charger. The battery charger shall be large enough to maintain the batteries and provide enough wattage to operate all of the control devices in the event of a power supply failure. Status indicating lights to indicate fully charged, charging or fault. The backup batteries shall be two sealed 12 Volt 5.0 Amp Hour to provide enough wattage to operate all of the control devices in the event of a power outage for at least 4 hours.

2.5 TELEMETRY PANEL ENCLOSURE

A. Control panel enclosure shall be NEMA constructed from 12 gauge 316 stainless steel with a #4 finish. All hardware on exterior of panel shall be stainless steel. Exterior door shall be held shut with pad lockable, 3-point door latch by Austin, or equivalent. The padlock is to be provided by the City. Inner door shall be held shut with latch, Emka wingknob and cam, or



equivalent. All doors shall be mounted to the enclosure with continuous hinges. Exterior door shall be gasketed to provide a watertight seal to the enclosure. Subpanel and inner door shall be 12 gauge mild steel primed and painted white. All panel wiring and equipment layout shall be performed per NEMA and JIC specifications. NEC gutter spacing shall be observed. A minimum of 6 inch additional D.I.N. rail shall be provided for future mounting expansion. Provide one 120 Volt cooling fan with finger guard, one 4” outlet on top corner with shroud and finger guard.

B. Temperature Control - The telemetry panel shall include an exhaust system to maintain a temperature below 105 degrees F. The exhaust system shall include an exhaust fan and appropriately sized air intake. Exhaust fan motors shall operate on 120 V, 60 Hz power and shall consist of an integral thermostat.

C. Condensation Heater - Provide a 100 watt, 120 VAC silicone rubber self-adhesive condensation heater mounted on a flange with integral 40 degree thermostat. Heater shall be as manufactured by Watlow or equivalent.

D. Wiring - Control wiring shall be minimum #16 gauge SIS type stranded wire for internal telemetry panel circuits. All control wires shall be numbered at each termination corresponding to the master wiring diagram with clip-sleeve or heat-shrink type wire markers. Wrap-on or adhesive wire markers shall not be allowed. All color coding for wires shall be per applicable NEC codes. All wiring shall be continuous between devices with no wire splices allowed in circuit runs

E. Corrosion Inhibitor - Provide a corrosion inhibitor mounted inside the telemetry panel. Corrosion inhibitor shall be Hoffman or equivalent.

F. Ground Buss/Lugs - Provide a ground lug sized for incoming power ground. Provide a ground buss for control equipment grounding, minimum 6 termination points.

G. Nameplates - Provide adhesive backed printed nameplates for all internal devices such as contactors, circuit breakers, and relays. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates, black letters on white background, for door-mounted devices such as selector switches, push-buttons, circuit breaker toggles, and pilot lights. Nameplates shall be secured firmly to the panel.

2.6 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide a Trio QR450 Licensed Ethernet Radio (Schneider Electric), or equivalent, installed using a din rail kit in the telemetry panel. An antenna lightening protection device is required for every radio unit. A 9 dB Yagi antenna with mounting hardware installed on an average of 30’ above ground pointing into a direction that will be determined and directed by the City of Shreveport for each location. Radio addressing, security, programming along with transmit and receive frequencies will be provided by the City of Shreveport sewer collections division. The radio is to provide communications between the station and the Lucas treatment facility via Modbus TCP/IP using the Standard City of Shreveport Modbus Register Collections System.

B. The 24 volt power supply shall be wired through a relay holding the backup batteries out of the circuit while the power supply is operating correctly. In the event that the power supply fails then the relay will drop out and the batteries will operate the system. The same 24 volts is to be an input to the PLC processor that will notify Lucas of a power supply failure. A



thermostat is required to monitor the cabinet temp in case of fan failure and the radio gear overheating. This alarm is to be reported to the Modbus register and then to Lucas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with installation requirements at each site.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine for suitable mounting conditions where controls and communication equipment will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Field personnel training on the entire control system including the PLC, HMI is required. Complete alarm commissioning and demonstration of the entire system is required on all new control panel installations.

3.3 CONNECTION TO THE LUCAS SYSTEM

A. The final Connection of the station radio information to the Lucas treatment facility is part of this scope of work. The color schemes, pump displays and alarms will be connected on the main SCADA system located at the Lucas Treatment Facility. Providing, installing, programming and testing of the entire radio system is a part of the telemetry panel scope of work.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section, "Conductors and Cables."

3.4 SOFTWARE/LICENSE REQUIREMENTS

A. The City of Shreveport software requirements: Siemens TIA Portal V 13” or Schneider Electric Unity Pro S V8.1. Any other software to be used must be pre-approved, and all license keys, development software and training (minimum of 40 hours) by the Manufacture’s Certified Engineers with the minimum of 5 years’ experience shall be included. Software must communicate Modbus TCP/IP.

3.5 STARTUP & TESTING

A. Prior to testing, all equipment shall be calibrated and verified by the pump station manufacturer’s authorized representative. Contractor shall provide City completed Equipment Supplier’s Certificate of Installation prior to startup and testing. All tests shall be



conducted in the presence of the City’s representative. Contractor shall provide the City with one week written notice prior to testing.

All controls and alarms shall be tested. All alarm conditions shall be simulated and the City’s SCADA system shall be programmed and shown to operate as intended. City’s staff shall be present whenever testing water is needed to verify that proper backflow protection is installed and used. If defective work product or equipment is found during the course of testing, the Contractor shall repair/rectify such defects to the satisfaction of the City, and repeat tests at no cost to the City. Following these tests, the pump station shall successfully operate for a period of 24 hours.

After issuing Final Completion, the City will operate the lift station for a minimum of 30 calendar days to verify proper operation and performance of the facility. Any work items found during this time to not meet the specifications will be rectified by the Contractor at no cost to the City.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16289

TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes SDPs for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. SPD: Surge Protection Devices.

C. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Product Certificates: For surge protection devices, signed by product manufacturer certifying compliance with the following standards:

1. UL 1283. 2. UL 1449.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Field quality-control test reports, including the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transient surge protection devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance of SPDs and are based on the specific system indicated.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits."

F. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices."

G. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and Third Edition UL 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors."

H. Comply with NFPA 70 (2014).


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer's written permission.

B. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage.

2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.



1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Cord-Connected, Plug-in SPDs: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace electronic equipment connected to circuits protected by SPDs.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. 2. Current Technology, Inc. 3. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation. 4. General Electric Company. 5. LEA International. 6. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson. 7. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 8. Square D; Schneider Electric. 9. Surge Suppression Incorporated. 10. Transtector Systems, Inc. 11. United Power Corporation.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Non-modular, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection

status.



B. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral

bus, and ground bus. 7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 10. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection

status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 11. Surge-event operations counter.

C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 320 kA per phase.

D. Connection Means: Permanently wired.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 480Y/277, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 800 V for 480Y/277. 2. Line to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277. 3. Neutral to Ground: 800 V for 480Y/277.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows:

1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.

H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltage of 480, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows:

1. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480 V. 2. Line to Ground: 2000 V for 480 V.



2.3 SURGE SUPPRESSORS WITHIN CONTROL PANELS

A. Surge Protection Device Description: Non-modular, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories:

1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Knockout mounted.

B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 20 kA per phase.

C. Connection Means: Permanently wired.

D. Manufacturers:

1. 120/208V, three phase

a. Cutler Hammer 2-CHSA01 b. General Electric 2-9L15FCB001 c. Joslyn 1455-21 d. Square-D 2-SDSA1175

2. 120/208V, single phase

a. Cutler Hammer CHSA01 b. General Electric 9L15FCB001 c. Joslyn 1261-21 d. Square-D SDSA1175

3. 120/240V, single phase

a. Cutler Hammer CHSA01 b. General Electric 9L15FCB001 c. Joslyn 1265-49 d. Square-D SDSA1175

4. 277/480V, three phase

a. Cutler Hammer CHSA03 b. General Electric 9L15ECC001 c. Joslyn 1456-21

5. Square-D SDSA3650

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 250, Type 4X, 316 stainless steel.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground.

B. Install devices for auxiliary panels with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

1. Provide multipole, 30-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment and control terminals to their sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected.


A. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,

"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transient voltage suppression devices. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16290

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Codes and Standards: Where indicated, the referenced edition shall govern. Where not indicated, the latest edition shall govern.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for building site components.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Details of the components to be used in the installation. 2. Calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate: UL Master Label.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

D. Comply with NFPA 70 (2014).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I, aluminum unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:



a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Harger. d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. e. Independent Protection Co. f. Preferred Lightning Protection. g. Robbins Lightning, Inc. h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Aluminum.

D. Ground Rods: Stainless steel, 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter by 10 feet (3 m).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to NFPA 780.

B. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

C. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.

3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches used for the following:

1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 16 Section "Fuses," for overcurrent protective devices installed in switches.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply

with requirements.

C. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and for components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches.





B. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 (2014).


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 degrees F (minus 30 degrees C) and not exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 meters).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Fusible Switches:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. DH Series b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. Type "TH" c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. "H" Series d. Square D Co. "H" Series

2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.

B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS




1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial – Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Features and Accessories: 1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. 3. Application listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact. 5. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with “a” and “b” contacts; “a” contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, “b” contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts. 6. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless steel, 316. 2. Corrosive Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel, 316. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless steel, 316.

2.5 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.



B. Switches shall be mounted so that operating handle is up when switch is on and down when it is off.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Indicate load designation.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches with ground continuity to main electrical ground lug.

B. Connect lightning arresters.

C. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and equipment.

D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and component. 2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

B. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16491

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V and less for use in switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.

B. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

1. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 1, include the following:

a. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. b. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data. c. Ambient temperature adjustment information.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from a single manufacturer.




C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.



A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) or more than 100 degrees F (38 degrees C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: Quantity equal to one complete set of each type and size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cooper Bussman, Inc. 2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 3. Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Class J, time delay.



B. Feeders: Class J, fast acting.

C. Motor Branch Circuits: Dual element, time delay, current limiting, Class RK5.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16521

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with LED arrays and drivers. 2. Poles and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Correlated Color Temperature (CCT) – a visible light characteristic of comparing a light source to a theoretical, heating black body radiator (measured in degrees kelvin).

B. Effective Projected Area (EPA) – the wind loading of the fixture.

C. HID: High-intensity discharge.

D. International Protection (IP) Rating – delineates the level at which foreign objects and water can intrude inside a device.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

G. Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) – products that are RoHS-compliant do not contain any of the following materials: lead (Pb), mercury (Hg), cadmium (Cd), hexavalent

H. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

I. Useful Life – the operating hours before reaching 70% of the initial rated lumen output point with no catastrophic failures under normal conditions.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf (2224 N), distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft. (143.6 Pa), applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.



D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles is 100 mph (160 km/h).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Drivers. 8. LED arrays. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. IESNA LM-79 report on manufacturer’s standard production model luminaire to include:

1. Testing agency, report number, date, manufacturer’s name, catalog number, LED driver, drive current, ambient temperature.

2. Luminaire efficacy (lumens/watt), minimum light output, zonal lumen density. 3. Color qualities (CCT, CRI, chromaticity). 4. ANSI C78.377 Duv. 5. Electrical measurements (input voltage, input current, input power). 6. Spectral distribution over visible wavelengths (mW/nm). 7. Absolute intensity candlepower (cd) summary table. 8. Isocandela plot 9. Photometric file, including BUG rating.

D. IESNA LM-80 report on LED package, array, or module, to include: 1. Testing agency, report number, date, type of equipment, and LED light source being

tested. 2. All data required by IESNA LM-80.



E. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.


C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."


E. LED LUMINAIRES 1. The LED manufacturer shall provide a written five-year on-site replacement “finish”

warranty for luminaires. Finish warranty shall include warranty against failure or substantial deterioration such as blistering, cracking, peeling, chalking, or fading.

2. The LED manufacturer shall provide a written five-year on-site replacement warranty for defective or non-starting power supply units and LED source assemblies, which include, but are not limited to, LED packages, LED arrays, LED modules, LED dies, encapsulates, and phosphors.

3. The LED manufacturer shall provide a written five-year on-site replacement warranty for any LED source assembly, package, array, or module, which does not include the power supply, against 10% or more of the individual LEDs in that assembly, package, array, or module failing to illuminate.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. LED arrays: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

2. Drivers: Furnish at least one of each type.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. As specified on the drawings or with approval prior to the bid. Approval granted prior to bid is subject, after the bid, to comparison with the specified equipment and to compliance with the plans, specifications and space limitation requirements.

2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during routine maintenance and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect driver when door opens.

G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.



2.3 LED LUMINAIRES

A. Provide luminaires complete with LED light source and power supply unit. Details, shapes, and dimensions are indicative of the general type desired but are not intended to restrict selection to luminaires of a particular manufacturer. Luminaires of similar design, light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable.

B. Luminaires shall be UL-listed for wet location and wiring cavities shall be field-accessible for service or repair needs.

C. Operating temperature: -30°C to + 40°C.

D. Luminaires shall be full cutoff or fully-shielded as defined by IESNA RP-8. Alternatively, the full cutoff shall be validated by meeting the following IESNA TM-15 B-U-G ratings (backlight, uplight, and glare):

1. Maximum uplight (U) rating: U1. 2. Maximum glare (G) rating equal: G2.

E. Optical systems for area luminaires, including the driver, shall be sealed and rated for IP 66 as defined in IEC 60529.

F. Luminaires shall be fully assembled and electrically tested prior to shipment from factory.

G. Coatings shall be capable of surviving ASTM B117 salt fog environment for 1000 hours minimum without blistering or peeling.

H. Coatings shall demonstrate gloss retention greater than or equal to 90% for 1000 hours’ exposure QUV test per ATM G 154 UVB313, 4-hour UV-B 60 °C/4-hour condensation 50 °C.

I. Luminaires shall be fully functional after testing for thermal shock according to IEC 60068-2-14.

J. Luminaires shall be tested according to IEC 60068-2-30, damp heat, steady state, for high humidity and high temperatures and be fully functional after testing.

K. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 204 stainless steel or zinc-plated steel.

L. If the lens is not integral to the luminaire, the optical enclosure (lens/window) shall be constructed from clear and UV-resistant acrylic and the lens shall be constructed from UV-treated tempered glass.

M. Efficacy: 100 lumens per watt.

N. Luminaires shall incorporate modular electrical connections and be constructed to allow replacement of all or part of the optics, heat sinks, power supply units, and electrical components using only a simple tool, such as a screwdriver.

O. Luminaires shall bear a nameplate inscribed with the manufacturer’s name, address, model number, date of manufacture, and serial number, securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.



P. Luminaires must pass 3G vibration testing in accordance with ANSI C136.31.

Q. Luminaires shall have surge protection to meet “C low” waveforms as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41.2, Scenario 1 Location Category C.

R. Luminaires shall incorporate provisions to attach a twist-lock style photocell.

S. Wiring: Twist-style wire nuts and tap-style stripless connectors are not acceptable for factory electrical connections.

2.4 POWER SUPPLY UNITS

A. Efficiency: 85%

B. Maximum drive current: 1000 mA.

C. Operating Temperature: -30 °C to +40 °C.

D. Operating Voltage: 120V to 277V nominal. Fluctuation in line voltage up to 15% shall have no visible effect on the luminous output.

E. Operating frequency: 50/60 Hz.

F. Power factor (PF): > 0.90.

G. Total current harmonic distortion (THD) for current: < 20%.

H. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Section 15, Class B, Non-Consumer RFI/EMI standards.

I. Reduction of hazardous substance- (RohS-) compliant.

J. Driver shall be protected against damage due to either an open-circuit or short-circuit fault condition on the driver output. The driver shall resume normal operation when the fault is removed.

K. Over-temperature protection shall be provided to cut off output power if temperature limit is exceeded. The driver shall resume normal operation when within normal operating temperature.

2.5 LED LIGHT SOURCE

A. Correlated color temperature (CCT) shall be in accordance with ANSI C78.377. 1. Nominal CCT: 3000 K: 3045 + 175 K 2. Nominal CCT: 4000 K: 3985 + 275 K 3. Nominal CCT: 5000 K: 5028 + 283 K 4. Nominal CCT: 6500 K: 6530 + 510 K

B. Color Rendering Index (CRI) shall be: 1. > 80 for 3000 K – 3500 K 2. > 70 for 40000 K – 6500 K



C. Thermal management shall be passive by design and shall consist of heat sinks with no fans, pumps, or liquids.

2.6 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

A. Photoelectric Cell: Solid state, with SPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contractor coils, microprocessor input, and complying with UL 773A.

1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16 to 108 1x), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.

2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor type, complying with IEEE C62.41 for Category

A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Integral to luminaire as scheduled.

2.7 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in Part 1 "Structural Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article, with a gust factor of 1.3.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components.

2.8 WOOD POLES

A. Poles: Southern yellow pine complying with ANSI 05.1 and with AWPA C4 for wood species used; and bored, roofed, and gained before treatment.

1. Mounting Provisions: Embedded.

B. Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat poles with ammoniacal copper arsenate according to AWPA C1 and AWPA C4.

C. Luminaire Brackets: Comply with ANSI C136.13.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.



B. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

B. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section, "Raceways and Boxes." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section, "Grounding and Bonding."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor on to pole connecting luminaire to grounding system.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION



SECTION 16718

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. UTP cabling. 2. RS-232 cabling. 3. RS-485 cabling. 4. Low-voltage control cabling. 5. Control-circuit conductors. 6. Identification products.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.


1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install conductors and cables that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.



1. Indications that wire and cables are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration and sagging of factory packing materials.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install UTP cable and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ADC. 2. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 5. CommScope, Inc. 6. Draka Cableteq USA. 7. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 8. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 9. Superior Essex Inc. 10. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 11. 3M; Communication Markets Division.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG.



2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


1. ADC. 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. AMP Netconnect; a brand of Tyco Electronics Corporation. 4. Belden Inc. 5. Dynacom Inc. 6. Hubbell Incorporated; Hubbell Premise Wiring. 7. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 8. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 9. Panduit Corp. 10. Siemon.

B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus [25] <Insert number> percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

2.4 RS-232 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. Polypropylene insulation. 3. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper

drain wire. 6. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

2.5 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM.

1. Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. 2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

2.6 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.



1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) and No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation. 3. Unshielded. 4. PVC jacket. 5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581.

2.7 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, complying with UL 83, in raceway.

C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83.

2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS


1. Brady Worldwide, Inc. 2. HellermannTyton North America. 3. Kroy LLC. 4. Panduit Corp.

B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for installation of supports for cables.



3.2 WIRING METHOD

A. Install wiring in metal pathways and wireways. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch (21 mm). Control and data transmission wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.

B. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended in writing

by manufacturer. 4. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. 5. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. 6. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type

terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Conductors: Size according to system manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make

terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. 4. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30

inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

5. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

6. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

7. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating.

8. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

D. UTP Cable Installation: Install using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5e rating of components and that ensure Category 5e performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.



3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

E. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm). b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300

mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches (600

mm).

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).

4. Separation between cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches (75

mm). c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

5. Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm).

6. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).

3.4 POWER AND CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. 120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. 2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. 3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG.



3.5 GROUNDING

A. For communications wiring, comply with J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

3. Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION





SPECIAL PROVISIONS


Public Landing Lift Station Improvements 100.2-1

SPECIAL PROVISION 100.2

STANDARD WORK WEEK

In Section 100.2 DEFINITIONS, replace Contract Time with the following definition.

Contract Time. The number of days or dates stated in the Contract to achieve Milestones, if any, and

complete the Work so that it meets the requirements of completion as evidenced by written

recommendation of the Engineer.

In Section 100.2 DEFINITIONS, replace Standard Work Week with the following definition.

Standard Work Week. The standard work week for contract time on a calendar day basis is Monday

through Friday, excluding Holidays, and the standard working hours are between 7:00 am and 7:00 pm.

The standard work week for contract time on a working day basis is Monday through Friday, excluding

Holidays, and the standard working hours are between 7:30 am and 4:30 pm.

END OF SPECIAL PROVISION




REPORTS

Insert the following paragraph immediately following Section 103.6

103.7 REPORTS. The following reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the site are known to the Engineer:

1. Report dated August 4, 2017 prepared by Dave Rambaran Geosciences, LLC, Shreveport, LA entitled “Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, Alabama Lift Station, 2938 Logan Avenue, Shreveport, Louisiana.”

2. Report dated August 14, 2017 prepared by Dave Rambaran Geosciences, LLC, Shreveport, LA entitled “Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, Hawkins Lift Station, 1600 Hawkins Street, Shreveport, Louisiana.”

3. Report dated August 21, 2017 prepared by Dave Rambaran Geosciences, LLC, Shreveport, LA entitled “Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, North Caddo Lift Station, 1303 Tolmak, Shreveport, Louisiana.”

4. Report dated August 16, 2017 prepared by Dave Rambaran Geosciences, LLC, Shreveport, LA entitled “Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, Patzman Park Lift Station, Refurbished/Replacement of the Wet-Well, 713 Christopher Street, Shreveport, Louisiana.”

5. Report dated August 18, 2017 prepared by Dave Rambaran Geosciences, LLC, Shreveport, LA entitled “Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, Pinehill Estates Lift Station, 3300 MLK, Jr. Dr., Shreveport, Louisiana.”

6. Report dated August 19, 2017 prepared by Dave Rambaran Geosciences, LLC, Shreveport, LA entitled “Report of Subsurface Exploration and Geotechnical Evaluation, Pinehill Road Lift Station, 2000 Pinehill Rd., Shreveport, Louisiana.”

Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of technical data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor, but such reports are not Contract Documents. Except for such reliance on technical data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against the City or the Engineer with respect to:

a. The completeness of such reports for the Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by the Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or

b. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports; or

c. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any technical data or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.



Public Landing Lift Station Improvements 108.3.3-1

SPECIAL PROVISION 108.3.3

STREET CLOSURES, DETOURS, BARRICADES

Insert the following paragraph after the first paragraph of Section 108.3.3 Street Closures, Detours,

Barricades.

A Maintenance of Traffic Plan consisting of a Barricade Plan and/or Traffic Control Plan is required for

temporary closure of any street, alley or other public thoroughfares. A Barricade Plan applies to a

specific application such as a temporary lane closure, and may be utilized for situations with a duration

of less than one week. Whenever Standard Plans are utilized for Barricade Plans, submit a

Maintenance of Traffic Plan which identifies the specific Standard Plan proposed for each location and

the duration of the Barricade Plan at each location. A Traffic Control Plan is required for all detours and

all other situations with a duration of one week or more. Traffic Control Plans included in the Drawings

are intended for use with an anticipated sequence of Work and shall be used as a guideline. Submit a

Maintenance of Traffic Plan which identifies proposed adjustments to the Traffic Control Plan and

durations of temporary signs and barricades at each location.





PROPERTY RESTORATION

Replace the fourth paragraph in Section 108.6.4 Preservation and Restoration of Property with the

following paragraph.

“Where paving and landscaping are removed in order to complete the Work, and when Contract Items

for replacement of paving and landscaping are included in the Bid Forms, payment for restoration of

those features will be made as specified. Other Contract Items not included in the Bid Forms are

considered incidental to the Work. The Contractor shall restore any public, private, or City‐owned

property disturbed or damaged as a direct or indirect result of construction operations to a condition

equivalent to the pre‐existing condition at no additional cost to the City. Restoration shall be completed

within 21 Days of backfilling excavations for pipelines and manholes. If the Contractor fails to complete

restoration or refuses to do so upon notice, the City may cause such restoration and deduct costs from

monies due, or which may become due, to the Contractor.”





OVERTIME

Replace Section 108.11 with the following Section 108.11.

108.11 OVERTIME. Overtime is time worked outside of a Standard Work Week. Overtime requires

written authorization from the Engineer. The Contractor must initiate the process by submitting an

Overtime Authorization Request for the Engineer’s authorization at least 48 hours in advance of starting

overtime work. Submit a specific description of anticipated work activities planned for each day of

overtime. If overtime is authorized, the actual work activities shall be limited to the planned work

activities for each day.





UTILITIES IN PUBLIC RIGHT‐OF‐WAY

Replace the first paragraph in Section 109.2 UTILITIES IN PUBLIC RIGHT‐OF‐WAY with the following

paragraph.

With the exceptions of water and sewer systems owned by the City and facilities specified in Section

109.4.6, the removal, adjusting, relocation or replacement of utility structures or facilities within the

public right‐of‐way which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be necessary for construction of the

Work, shall be performed by the respective owners of the utilities at their expense. The Contractor shall

perform temporary disconnection, removal, reinstallation, reconnection and adjustment of a water

service which needs to be disturbed in order to accomplish the Work.





SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT

Replace the paragraphs 1 through 5 of Section 110.1 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT with the following

paragraphs.

Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or

as a replacement, against whom City may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to

employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work

against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, furnish an informational submittal

identifying proposed Subcontractors, along with their Louisiana Contractors License Number and the

expiration date if applicable. The initial submittal shall include Subcontractors identified on FSC Form 2

submitted prior to execution of the Contract. Proposed Subcontractors shall be deemed acceptable to

the Engineer unless a substantive, reasonable objection is raised within 7 days. Refer to Section 40 – Fair

Share Requirements, 4.0 Addition/Replacement of Subcontractors After Submission for additional

requirements. The Contractor shall maintain adequate records at all times to show compliance with the

licensure requirements of all subcontracts and Subcontractors.

If no objection is raised, the Contractor will be permitted to sublet a portion of the work but shall be

required to pay at least 51 percent of wages paid under the contract to workmen, mechanics or labors

who are employed directly by the Contractor’s own organization. Any items designated in the contract as

"Specialty Items” may be performed by subcontract, and the cost of any such Specialty Items so

performed by subcontract may be deducted from the total cost before computing the amount of work

required to be performed by the Contractor with his own organization. No subcontracts or transfer of

contract shall serve to relieve the Contractor of its liability under the contract and bonds.

A Subcontractor shall not subcontract any portion of its authorized work.



Public Landing Lift Station Improvements 209.5.2.1-1

SPECIAL PROVISION 209.5.2.1

PVC GRAVITY SEWER PIPE

Replace Section 209.5.2.1 PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe with the following Section 209.5.2.1.

209.5.2.1 PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe. PVC pipe shall conform to cell classification 12454 in accordance with the standards of ASTM D1784 and shall meet chemical resistance classification S47542 in accordance with the standards of ASTM D5260. PVC pipe and fittings for nominal diameters 8” through 15” shall meet the standards of ASTM D3034 with wall thickness for a minimum SDR 35. PVC pipe and fittings for nominal diameters 18” through 36” shall meet the standards of ASTM F679 with wall thickness for a minimum PS46. Pipe and fittings shall have integral bell and spigot ends. Each integral bell joint shall be the push‐on type meeting the standards of ASTM D3212 and consisting of a formed bell with a self‐contained rubber ring gasket designed for close tolerances and thermal expansion and contraction. The rubber ring gasket shall meet the standards of ASTM F477. Insertion of the spigot into the bell shall form a compressed, sealed joint providing maximum protection against infiltration in wet ground installations. PVC pipe shall be manufactured by JM Eagle, IPEX, or approved equal. Restrained joint PVC (RJ‐PVC) pipe shall have precision‐machined grooves on the pipe and in the integral bell which, when aligned, allow a spline to be inserted to provide a fully circumferential restrained joint that locks the pipes together. RJ‐PVC pipe up to 8” nominal diameter shall meet the standards of ASTM D2241 with wall thickness for a minimum DR 21. RJ‐PVC pipe for 10” and 12” nominal diameters shall meet the standards of ASTM D2241 with wall thickness for a minimum DR 26. RJ‐PVC pipe shall be Certa‐Flo PVC Gravity Sewer Pipe with Certa‐Lok restrained joint integral bell manufactured by North American Pipe Corporation, or approved equal.




SPECIAL PROVISION 310

TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENTATION AND WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL IN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY

Replace Section 310 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL with the following Section 310 TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENTATION AND WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION AND CONTROL IN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY

310.1 DESCRIPTION This Work includes preparing permit applications, obtaining permits, constructing and maintaining temporary and permanent pollution control features shown on the Drawings and as necessary to prevent and control soil erosion, sedimentation, and water pollution that may degrade receiving waters including rivers, streams, lakes, reservoirs, groundwater, and wetlands. The control measures contained herein shall be installed and maintained throughout the construction contract and coordinated with any permanent or temporary pollution control features specified elsewhere on the plans and in the specifications to assure effective and continuous water pollution control throughout the construction and post-construction periods. The Engineer may require additional temporary control measures if it appears that pollution or erosion may result from weather, the nature of the materials, or progress on the Work. The Engineer may also require erosion control Work to be done with or immediately after grading or trench backfilling. The Contractor shall obtain a Land Altering Activity Permit (LAAP) from the City before commencing land-altering activities including clearing, grading, excavating and filling. The Contractor shall prepare a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and prepare a Notice of Intent (NOI) where more than 5 acres of land will be disturbed by construction activities, and submit the NOI to the State prior to commencing land-altering activities. Prepare and submit a Notice of Termination (NOT) to the State after Final Acceptance of the Work.

Sediment control devices and BMPs shall be installed prior to any ground disturbing activity. The controls that are used in the right-of-way may include, but are not limited to:

1. Ground cover: temporary seeding, temporary mulching, compost blanket, permanent ground cover (sod, permanent seeding, etc.).

2. Drainage swales and channels: Rock bags, sand bags, rock check dams, earth dike, compost socks (low velocity).

3. Slopes: filter fence, erosion control blanket, straw wattles, temporary seeding/mulching on gentle slopes, compost socks and compost berms.

4. Inlet / catch basin protection: catch basin filter, curb inlet filters, straw wattles or compost socks in grassed areas (low velocity), rock filled bags, wire weir.

Additional information regarding other controls can be found on Louisiana DEQ LPDES Permit website. Sediment control devices shown on the Drawings are minimum requirements. Not all materials are shown on the Drawings, but appropriate use is described in this specification. The Engineer may increase or decrease the quantity of these items as needs arise. The Engineer may allow the use of other materials and work methods as the need arises.



310.2 CONTROL OF ERODIBLE SOIL

(a) General: The Contractor shall prevent the transmission of soil particles into streams, canals, lakes, reservoirs or other waterways. Except as necessary for construction, excavated material shall not be deposited into streams or impoundments, or in a position close enough to be washed in waterways by high water or runoff. The Contractor shall not disturb lands or waters outside the limits of construction.

(b) Adjacent to Waterways: Stream banks shall be kept in their natural state. The Contractor shall not unnecessarily strip protective vegetation in the vicinity of stream banks and shall conduct operations without damage to banks. Banks shall not be excavated except as shown on the plans or as otherwise approved in writing. Work roads requiring bank cuts shall be approved by the Engineer prior to making such cuts. The banks shall be restored by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

(c) Adjacent to Property: The Contractor shall stop all sediment from transmission of soil particles onto adjacent private property except where a servitude exists. Soil deposits shall be immediately removed and the surface repaired at no direct pay. The City Engineer may suspend the Contractor's operations until erosion deposits have been cleared and the area restored.

310.3 SUBMITTALS

Materials shall be approved based on visual inspection. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall submit for acceptance the schedules for accomplishing the storm water pollution control measures in accordance with the Erosion Control Plan or the Construction Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Land disturbing activities shall not begin until the schedules for implementation of the controls and methods of operation have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 310.4 MATERIALS Materials not covered by project specifications shall meet commercial grade standards and product information submitted and approved before being incorporated into the project. No testing of materials used in temporary erosion control features will be required. Materials shall meet the following requirements:

(a) Mulch: Mulches shall comply with applicable requirements of Section 203.4. Mulching may

be used as temporary ground cover in all areas where the existing surface has been disturbed. Locations are not shown on the Drawings.

(b) Seeding: Temporary grass seed shall comply with applicable requirements of Section 203.3 with an approved quick-growing species suitable to the area which will not compete with permanent grasses, providing a temporary ground cover in all areas where the existing surface has been disturbed. Rye grass is the only acceptable grass for winter cover. Topsoil and fertilizer are not required with temporary seeding. Permanent grass seeding shall comply with applicable requirements of Section 1201.5. Only permanent ground cover locations are shown on the Drawings.

(c) Sod: Sod shall comply with applicable requirements of Section 1201.5. Sod may be used as temporary or permanent ground cover in all areas where the existing surface has been disturbed. Only permanent ground cover locations are shown on the Drawings.



(d) Compost Blanket: Compost blankets shall consist of coarse compost mulch uniformly applied with a pneumatic blower, skid steer loader or hand shovel. Blanket thickness shall be between 2 inches and 4 inches. Fine compost may be used instead and incorporated into the soil as a soil amendment for the permanent ground cover.

(e) Rock and Sand Bags: Bags may be used in drainage swales/channels as a temporary check dam 18 inches to 36 inches high or around catch basins and inlets to protect the structures to block heavy sediment and filtrate the surface runoff before it enters into the drainage system. The bags shall be polypropylene, polyethylene, polyamide or cotton burlap woven fabric which meets the following requirements. Minimum unit weight 4 ounces per square yard; Mullen burst strength exceeding 300 psi as determined by ASTM D3786 Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics Diaphragm Bursting Strength Tester Method; and ultraviolet stability exceeding 70 percent. Bag length shall be 24 inches to 30 inches, width shall be 16 inches to 18 inches and thickness shall be 6 inches to 8 inches, with an approximate weight of 40 pounds. Bags shall be filled with Fill Sand, Base Course Aggregates or Type 1 Asphaltic Surface Treatment Aggregate as specified in Section 200. All catch basins and inlets within the limits of work shall be protected, whether shown or not shown on the Drawings. Check dams, if needed, are shown on the Drawings.

(f) Rock Check Dams: Check dams are intended to reduce the velocity of small concentrated flows, provide a limited barrier for sediment and help disperse concentrated flow. Check dams may be used on slopes and in drainage swales/channels to block silt and slow the velocity from construction activities where surface runoff flows directly into the drainage swale/channel and where silt fencing, straw wattles, or where compost socks are not practicable. If needed, locations are shown on the Drawings. Rock material shall be Type A Rip-Rap Stone as specified in Section 200. Broken concrete may be used for rip-rap stone. Installation shall be similar to dikes as shown on Standard Plans 310-7, 310-8 and 310-9.

(g) Interceptor Swale or Earth dike: If needed, swales or earth dikes may be utilized to divert flow to a sediment trap. Dikes shall be installed as shown on Standard Plans 310-7, 310-8 and 310-9. This is not typically needed in the right-of-way but shall be utilized if necessary.

(h) Silt Fencing: Silt fencing is used at the base of disturbed slopes to prevent sediment transport away from the disturbed slope. Locations of silt fencing are shown on the Drawings and installation requirements are shown on Standard Plans 310-1 and 310-2. Silt fences shall be wire-supported or self-supported systems as necessary for the particular application. Other silt fencing systems may be used when approved by the Engineer. (1) Wire-Supported: Wire-supported silt fencing shall consist of standard woven livestock

wire, and minimum of 14-gage wire, a minimum of 36 inches in height with a maximum wire spacing of 6 inches. Posts shall be either wood or steel installed a minimum of 2 feet in the ground. Filter material shall be burlap weighing approximately 7 1/2 ounces per square yard (0.25 kg per sq m), approved jute fabric or approved geotextile fabric. Geotextile fabric shall be Class F as specified in Section 211.

(2) Self-Supported: Self-supported silt fencing shall consist of an approved geotextile fabric suitably attached to posts of either wood or steel installed in accordance with Standard Plans. Geotextile fabric shall be Class G as specified in Section 211.

(i) Erosion Control Blanket: Provide Erosion Control Systems as specified in Section 1203.

(j) Compost Socks, Compost Filter Berms, Straw Wattles: Compost socks, compost filter berms and straw wattles are alternatives to silt fences and earth dikes. Compost socks shall consist of mesh fabric tube with a minimum strand thickness of 5 mils, and shall be warranted by the manufacturer for use in compost socks. Socks share be free of cuts and



tears and be at least 8 inches in diameter. Fill socks with coarse compost. Compost filter berms shall have a triangular cross-section with 2:1 base to height ratio, minimum 2 feet wide by 1 foot high. Coarse compost shall be pneumatically applied. Compost filter berms may only be used for up to two weeks unless backed up with silt fence. Compost berms may be used to amend the soil prior to permanent ground cover installation. Straw wattles may be used as protection around catch basins that are located in grassed areas.

(k) Catch Basin Filters: Products are used to protect catch basins by trapping silt in bags supported below the grate and filtering flow before it enters into the structure. These products are reusable. Catch basin filters shall be Siltsack by BMP Store, Streamguard by Bowhead Environmental & Safety, Dandy Sack by Dandy Products or equal.

(l) Curb Inlet Filters: Products are used to protect curb inlets by trapping silt and filtering flow before it enters into the structure. These products are reuseable and not intended to fully block the opening. If that is the case, clean the sidewalks, gutters and pavement and remove the filters ahead of anticipated large storm events. Curb inlet protection may be GutterGator by Construction Eco Services, Gutterbuddy by BMP Store, Dandy Curb by Dandy Products, or equal.

310.5 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall provide control measures to prevent or minimize the impact of its operations to receiving waters. Should the control measures fail to function effectively, the Contractor shall act immediately to bring the erosion and sedimentation under control by maintain existing controls or by providing additional controls as directed by the Engineer. Maintain clean paved surfaces at the Site and remove sediment that accumulates on the roadway, sidewalks, and driveways. The Contractor shall inspect the entire project to determine the condition of the control measures at least once every calendar week and within 24 hours of runoff events in which storm water discharges from the site. Sediment shall be removed and devices repaired as soon as practicable but no later than seven days after the surrounding exposed ground has dried sufficiently to prevent further damage from equipment operations needed for repairs. Should the Contractor fail to perform required temporary erosion, sedimentation and water pollution prevention and control work in a timely fashion or fail to prevent and control soil erosion, sedimentation and water pollution which may degrade receiving waters, the City reserves the right to have the work performed by others. All costs to the City shall be reimbursed by the Contractor within 30 days after receipt of the reimbursement request from the City. Failure to submit payment for such reimbursement costs in the time prescribed above may result in the City withholding the reimbursement due from the monthly progress payments to the Contractor until reimbursement to the City is made. In any disturbed area where construction activities have ceased, the Contractor shall initiate stabilization of the area by the use of temporary or permanent ground cover with 14 days, except where construction is anticipated to resume in 21 days. When the site is adequately stabilized in the opinion of the Engineer, the control measures and temporary stabilization measures shall be removed and properly disposed of by the Contractor and permanent ground stabilization installed.



The Contractor shall limit the amount of disturbed area to the area of surface restoration shown on the Drawings to the extent possible. The City has the authority to limit the disturbed surface area exposed by construction operations. The Contractor shall provide protection of trees and shrubs in proximity to the construction operations. The right-of-way may not be used as staging area. Refer to requirements specified in Section 4600 for storage of materials. All staging areas and vehicle maintenance areas shall be constructed in a manner to minimize the runoff of pollutants. 310.6 MEASUREMENT When temporary erosion and pollution control measures are required due to the Contractor's negligence or failure to install permanent controls, such work shall be performed by the Contractor at no direct pay. Temporary erosion and pollution control items which are eligible for payment will be measured as follows:

Vegetative Mulch: Measurement and Payment shall be as specified in Section 1201. Seed Lawn Planting: Measurement and Payment for temporary and permanent seed lawn planting shall be as specified in Section 1201.

Sod Lawn: Measurement and payment for sod lawn planting shall be as specified in Section 1201.

Erosion Control System: Measurement and Payment for erosion control systems shall be as specified in Section 1203.

Compost Blanket: Compost blankets shall be measured by the ton of material, complete in place.

Rock and Sand Bags (Check Dam): When used as a check dam, measurement shall be per linear foot, complete in place.

Rock and Sand Bags (Inlet Protection): When used as inlet protection, measurement shall be made by the individual bag, complete in place.

Rock Check Dams: Measurement shall be per linear foot, complete in place.

Interceptor Swale or Earth Dike: Measurement shall be per linear foot, complete in place.

Silt Fencing: Measurement shall be per linear foot, complete in place.

Compost Socks, Compost Filter Berms, Straw Wattles: Measurement shall be per linear foot, complete in place. Catch Basin Filters: Measurement shall be made by the individual unit, complete in place. Curb Inlet Filters: Measurement shall be made by the individual unit, complete place.

End of Special Provisions




EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Replace Section 1002 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL with the following Section 1002 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

1002.1 GENERAL. This section specifies requirements for excavation and backfilling pipe, structures and appurtenances for water systems and sewer systems. Provide appropriate notification to Louisiana One Call™(811) in advance of excavation. 1002.2 RELATED WORK. The specifications listed below include some requirements related to excavation. The list does not include all related specifications. Section 109 Utilities Section 1004 Trench Safety Systems Section 1005 Trench Dewatering 1002.3 REFERENCES. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only and the most recent edition shall be used.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C403 Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete

Mixtures by Penetration Resistance ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined

Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort ASTM D2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)

OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) 29 CFR Part1926 Subpart P Safety and Health Regulations for Construction - Excavations 1002.4 MATERIALS. Only approved, suitable materials shall be used for bedding and backfill materials. Unsuitable materials have any of the following characteristics and shall not be used.

Soil material which would otherwise be suitable but contains roots, other organic matter, scrap material, frozen material and stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension.

Man-made fills (except Flowable Fill) Trash or refuse Backfills from previous construction Muck as described in Section 306 ASTM D2321 Class V Soils (predominantly fine-grained soils)



ASTM D 2321 Class IV Soils (clays and silts) Soil that exceeds the EPA contamination guidelines

Class IV soils exhibiting low liquid limits may be suitable for use in specific applications with approval of the Engineer. When the type of backfill material is not specified or indicated on the Drawings, the excavated native material may be used, provided that such material is suitable for backfill and approved by the Engineer. The Engineer may require a soil analysis before approving the excavated soil for use as backfill. The excavated native material may not be used without Engineer’s approval. Excavated native material used as backfill material must be of a quality that will compact, will not settle or shrink and will not become unstable when wet. If the excavated native material is too wet but otherwise suitable for use as backfill material, the Contractor shall make a reasonable effort to spread and dry it, or otherwise mix in additional dry soil to make the excavated native material suitable for backfilling. 1002.4.1 Coarse Aggregate Material shall conform to the following particle size distribution.

Gradation U.S. Sieve % Passing

3/4" 100

1/2" 60-95 3/8" 25-60

#4 Sieve 5-15

#10 Sieve 4 (min.) 1002.4.2 Fine Granular Material shall conform to the following particle size distribution.

Gradation U.S. Sieve % Passing

½” 95-100 No. 10 75-100 No. 200 0-10

1002.4.3 Select Material. Select material is defined as dry Fine Granular Material or native soil with a low Plasticity Index consisting of sand, sandy loam or loam with less than 5% clay. Plasticity Index must be less than 15. The material should not form mud or muck when wet and have non-plastic Atterberg Limits as indicated in the ASTM D2321 soil classification. 1002.4.4 Structural Fill. All fill and backfill adjacent to wet wells, vaults, or other structures and below all slabs and pavement shall be structural fill from off site. Structural fill shall be composed of material with dry density in excess of 100 pounds per cubic foot (pcf); Plasticity Index (PI) between 8 and 18; and a Liquid Limit (LL) less than 38. Also, the material shall be classified as a clay or sandy clay (CL) with more than 70 percent of the material passing the #200 sieve. Any fill to be placed at the site shall be approved by the geotechnical engineer. The structural fill shall be compacted to 98% to within 4 feet and 95% below 4 feet of the top of slab/pavement elevation of Standard Proctor maximum dry density and within -1 to +3% of the optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D-698. Both density and moisture requirements shall be met. The lifts shall not exceed 8 to 12 inches thick, depending on the compaction equipment used. Density and moisture tests shall be performed on each lift prior to placement of subsequent lifts. 1002.4.5 SB2 Crushed Stone Base. At least 12 inches of SB2 stone meeting the requirements of LaDOTD section 301 shall be placed directly under the wet well base. The SB2 stone fill shall be compacted to a minimum of 98% of the standard Proctor (ASTM D-698) maximum dry density and within



-2 to +2% of the optimum moisture. 1002.4.6 Finely Divided Material. Finely divided material is defined as dry soil suitable as backfill and with not more than 10% rocks and stones (by volume) that are less than two inches in diameter. 1002.4.7 Flowable Fill. Flowable Fill shall achieve penetration resistance between 500 and 1500 psi in accordance with the standards of ASTM C403. Minimum compressive strength shall be 20 psi after 3 days and 50 psi after 28 days. The following typical mix design shall be adjusted to achieve the specified properties.

Typical Mix Design for Flowable Fill - 50 psi @ 28 Days

Cement

ASTM C150, Type 1

50 lbs.

Fly Ash

ASTM C618

200 lbs.

Fine Aggregate

Concrete Sand

2,900 lbs.

Water

60 gal.

Bentonite may be added to the mix design to improve the flow characteristics for Flowable Fill when pumping is required. Testing may be performed at the Engineer’s direction. Material not placed within 3 hours after mixing or material which has obtained an initial set may be rejected. Flowable Fill is used for filling abandoned piping systems as specified in Section 1003 Abandonment of Existing Water Main and Sanitary Sewer Facilities. Flowable Fill may be used for trench backfill, foundation backfill and structural backfill. Provide temporary containment for Flowable Fill to avoid stressing or displacement of existing structures until the initial set is achieved. 1002.4.8 Concrete Arch Encasement. Concrete for arch encasement material shall be Structural Class "D" as specified in Section 201. Reinforcing Steel shall be Grade 40 as specified in Section 201. 1002.4.9 Circumferential Concrete Encasement. Concrete for circumferential encasement shall be Structural Class "R" as specified in Section 201. Two concrete test cylinders will be prepared for each 100 cubic yards of concrete placed. One concrete test cylinder will be prepared when less than 100 cubic yards are placed in a day. 1002.5 TRENCH ZONES. The Foundation Zone encompasses the area below the Pipe Embedment zone when unsuitable materials are encountered in the bottom of the trench. The Pipe Embedment Zone encompasses the Bedding Layer, the Haunching Area and the Initial Backfill. The Final Backfill encompasses the area from the top of the Pipe Embedment Zone to the subgrade or finished grade or other limits shown on the Drawings. 1002.5.1 Foundation Fill. When over-excavation of unsuitable material is required by the Engineer, Coarse Aggregate Material shall be placed over geotextile fabric and brought up from the bottom of the trench to the bottom of the Pipe Embedment Zone. Flowable Fill may be used as an alternative to Coarse Aggregate Material and geotextile fabric for Foundation Fill. 1002.5.2 Bedding Layer. The Bedding Layer extends from the bottom of the trench (or from the top of Foundation Fill, if used) to the bottom of the pipe or structure. Bedding material varies depending on the type of piping system. Provide Coarse Aggregate Material as shown on Standard Plan 2000-1 for gravity sewer systems. Provide Select Material as shown on Standard Plans 3000-1 and 3000-2 for pressure piping systems, i.e. water mains and force mains. 1002.5.3 Haunching Area. The Haunching Area extends from the top of the Bedding Layer to the springline of the pipe. Haunching material varies depending on the type of piping system. Provide Coarse



Aggregate Material as shown on Standard Plan 2000-1 for gravity sewer systems. Provide Select Material as shown on Standard Plans 3000-1 and 3000-2 for pressure piping systems, i.e. water mains and force mains. 1002.5.4 Initial Backfill. Initial Backfill extends from the top of the Haunching Area to a line 12 inches above the top of the pipe, which is the top of the Pipe Embedment Zone. Initial backfill material varies depending on the type of piping system. Provide Coarse Aggregate Material as shown on Standard Plan 2000-1 for gravity sewer systems. Provide Finely Divided Material as shown on Standard Plans 3000-1 and 3000-2 for pressure piping systems, i.e. water mains and force mains. 1002.5.5 Final Backfill. Final Backfill extends from the top of the Pipe Embedment Zone to the subgrade or finished grade or other limits shown on the Drawings. Material may consist of suitable material removed from the excavation, with moisture content adjusted to achieve the required density.

1002.5.6 Backfill Using Imported Materials. Native material which is unsuitable for use as backfill material shall be replaced with imported material when authorized by the Engineer. Imported materials used for Final Backfill may be Select Material or Flowable Fill as approved by the Engineer.

1002.6 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. 1002.6.1 Trench Excavation. Excavate trenches to the required alignment, depth and width in accordance with the regulations of 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P. Provide trench safety systems as specified in Section 1004. Trench excavation shall proceed in advance of pipe installation only as far as safe trench conditions can be maintained for workmen and only far enough ahead to achieve efficiency in pipe installation operations. The trench should be opened no more than 100 feet ahead of where pipe is being installed in the trench. Where space is not restricted, slope or bench the sides of the trench in order to prevent caving. Maintain sides and slopes of the excavation in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. Provide sheeting and bracing where sloping is not possible because of space restriction or instability of material excavated. Where regulations permit, the trench sides may be cut as nearly vertical as possible from the bottom of the trench to the top of the Pipe Embedment Zone. The trench width from the bottom of the excavation to the top of the Pipe Embedment Zone shall not exceed the maximum widths shown in Standard Plans 2000-1, 3000-1 or 3000-2. When sheeting and bracing are required, the trench width may be adjusted to permit installation of these items. Damages and extra work caused by the Contractor’s failure to properly protect trench beds and walls shall be repaired at no additional cost to the City. Protect the trench and backfill at all times and erect temporary diversion dams or ditches as necessary to keep surface water out of the trench. Divert surface water into existing drainage systems or streams. After installation of pipe and fill materials has started, replace soil saturated by surface water with dry, suitable material at no additional cost to the City. Prevent sewage from flowing in trenches and do not cover sewage with backfill material. The bottom of the trenches shall be accurately graded to undisturbed earth, or compacted to the same density as the undisturbed soil. Prepare and maintain a dry, stable trench bottom until the Pipe Embedment Zone is complete. Bedding material, pipe, structures, haunching material and initial backfill shall not be placed in wet or unstable trenches. Provide dewatering other than by wellpointing as specified in Section 1005 to remove all standing water from the trench. Care shall be taken to not excavate below the depths indicated in the Drawings. Excavations exceeding planned depths shall be backfilled with Fine Granular Material as necessary to restore the trench to the required depth at no additional cost to the City. When the Engineer requires over-excavation of unsuitable material, the Contractor shall excavate to the required depth and backfill to the planned depth with coarse aggregate material. Provide Class B, C or D geotextile fabric specified in Section 211



completely wrapped around coarse aggregate material. 1002.6.2 Bedding Installation. The bedding layer shall be brought up from the bottom of the trench or from the top of the foundation fill to the proper grade required for the bottom of the pipe. Make adjustments to maintain the pipe on the required grade by adding or removing bedding material. Wedging or blocking up the pipe is not permitted. Compact bedding material using equipment specifically designed for compacting (vibratory roller, vibratory plate, jumping jack tamping rammer, hand tamper, etc.). Remove bedding material as necessary to form recesses matching the shape and dimensions of the pipe bells and place the pipe on the graded and compacted bedding. The full length of each pipe barrel section shall have uniform bearing on the trench bedding so that neither the bell end nor the spigot end is unevenly loaded. Bedding material for gravity sewer pipe shall consist of Coarse Aggregate Material compacted to 60 percent relative density based on specific gravity of the material. Bedding material for pressure pipe shall consist of Select Material compacted to 95% maximum density (ASTM D698). 1002.6.3 Haunching Installation. Haunching material shall be placed after the bedding and pipe are installed, and shall be worked under the sides of the pipe to provide firm support in the haunching area. Place and compact material to the springline in a single lift for pipe diameters up to 15 inches and in multiple lifts for pipe diameters greater than 15 inches. Carefully hand tamp the material so the position of the pipe is not altered. Haunching material for gravity sewer pipe shall consist of Coarse Aggregate Material compacted to 60 percent relative density based on specific gravity of the material. Haunching material for pressure pipe shall consist of Select Material compacted to 95% maximum density (ASTM D698). 1002.6.4 Initial Backfill Installation. Place and compact Initial Backfill Material from the springline to the top of the Pipe Embedment Zone in even lifts not exceeding 8 inches. Carefully hand tamp the material so the position and circularity of the pipe are not altered. Initial Backfill Material for gravity sewer pipe shall consist of Coarse Aggregate Material compacted to 60 percent relative density based on specific gravity of the material. Initial Backfill Material for pressure pipe shall consist of Finely Divided Material compacted to 95% maximum density (ASTM D698). 1002.6.5 Final Backfill Installation. Place and compact soil material in even lifts not exceeding 8 inches. The required density of final backfill material is determined by the load bearing zone shown on Standard Plan 605-2a. Final backfill within the load bearing zone shall be compacted to 95% maximum density (ASTM D698). Use equipment specifically designed for compacting (vibratory roller, vibratory plate, jumping jack tamping rammer, hand tamper, etc.) the work in lifts without displacement of pipe or damage to service connections. Excavator and loader buckets shall not be used for compaction, as they are not designed for the purpose. Water settlement of backfill material is not permitted. When approved by the Engineer, pipe pressure and leak testing may be performed before completing backfill so that pipe joints are visible for leak detection. In such cases, backfill shall be placed over the pipe barrel between the joints to prevent movement. 1002.6.6 Testing. The City will provide material testing services as specified in Section 106. Contractor shall cooperate with the City and testing laboratory personnel as specified in Section 4410. The minimum frequency of density testing shall be as follows.

a. In State and Parish rights-of-way, the number and location of density tests shall be as prescribed in applicable State or Parish specifications. Otherwise, it shall be as specified below.

b. Backfill - Two tests per each 1,000 linear feet, or fraction thereof, of pipe length per each 2 feet

of vertical depth above the pipe springline.



c. Bedding – Two tests per 1,000 linear feet of pipe prior to installing pipe.

In no case shall the number of density tests be less than four per 1,000 linear feet. In addition, testing will be performed at the City’s discretion. The Contractor shall provide samples of any proposed imported materials for laboratory testing and approval in advance. soil or soils he intends to use as backfill. Testing for Flowable Fill will be performed as directed by the Engineer. Material which has obtained an initial set and material not placed within 3 hours after loading may be rejected. 1002.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS. Excavated material that is suitable for use as backfill material without drying or amendment may be stockpiled near the work. Unsuitable materials excess materials shall be removed from the Site.





ABANDONMENT OF MANHOLES

Replace Section 1003.3.2 Manholes with the following paragraphs.

1003.3.2 Manholes. “Manhole rings and covers shall be salvaged from abandoned manholes and delivered to the City's Central Supply and Warehouse facility at 2139 Greenwood Road, Shreveport, Louisiana. The manhole structure shall be demolished to a level two feet below natural grade or proposed grade shown on the plans. The demolished material shall be removed from the site and disposed of as specified in Section 302 Removal of Structures and Obstructions. Plug connections to pipelines which are removed or not designated for abandonment. Fill abandoned manholes with select material, finely divided material, or pumped grout. At abandoned manholes in unpaved areas, fill the remaining excavation with select material or finely divided material to an elevation and surface to match finished grade. Compact fill to match the density of the surrounding soil. At abandoned manholes in paved areas, fill the remaining excavation to the subgrade with select material placed and compacted as specified in Section 1002.3.3 Select Material, or with flowable fill as specified in Section 1002.3.4.1 Flowable Fill. Provide base and pavement to match existing or as shown on the Drawings.”





TRENCH DEWATERING Replace Section 1005 TRENCH DEWATERING with the following Section 1005 TRENCH DEWATERING.

1005.1 GENERAL. This section specifies the methods to be used for trench dewatering and maintaining dry trench conditions in order to assure that bedding material and pipes can be placed on dry, firm trench bottoms and to minimize sloughing and cave-in of trench walls. Dry conditions as referenced in this section shall be defined to mean a soil condition such that the in-place moisture content of the soil is no more than two percentage points above the optimum moisture content of the soil as determined by ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557.

1005.2 REFERENCES. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only and the most recent edition shall be used.

ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort.

ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort.

1005.3 PRE-DRAINAGE DEWATERING. Pre-drainage dewatering requires lowering the groundwater table at least 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation before excavation begins. Methods include deep wells, wellpoints, eductors, vacuum wells and horizontal wells. The Contractor shall design the system to lower the local groundwater table at least 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation. Provide at least 2 temporary groundwater observation wells strategically located at each location to determine the level of the groundwater table during construction.

1005.3.1 Submittals. Provide an action submittal of a pre-drainage dewatering plan including the following items.

a. Elevations of existing groundwater table, excavations and groundwater table during construction b. Description of soil conditions and the method of lowering the groundwater table c. Sketches showing layout of excavation, temporary groundwater observation wells, dewatering

system components and groundwater discharge points d. List of dewatering system components and capacity of mechanical equipment e. Description of sound attenuation systems to control noise in compliance with City ordinance

requirements f. Identification of any permits required for temporary wells or disposal of discharged water

1005.3.2 Construction. Furnish, install and maintain all materials and equipment necessary for pre-drainage dewatering including generators, wells, pumps, sediment traps and discharge piping. Trap and remove sediment from water discharged during dewatering. Lower the groundwater table as specified prior to excavation in order to maintain the integrity of the undisturbed soil material. Maintain dewatering in continuous operation until the pipe or structure has been installed and backfill has been compacted and installed to final grade or subgrade.



1005.4 DEWATERING AFTER EXCAVATION BEGINS. Provide sump pumping whenever groundwater or surface water enters the excavation, including seepage during pre-drainage excavation. Remove water that accumulates in the excavation to maintain a dry and stable subgrade. Maintain dewatering as necessary to assure excavations are dry and safe enough to install pipe and structures as required by the Contract Documents. indicated on the construction plans. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all applicable permits including but not limited to well permits, discharge permits prior to dewatering. Copies of all permits shall be submitted to the City.

1005.5 DISCHARGE AND DISPOSAL OF WATER. Discharge and dispose of water from dewatering operations in a manner that will prevent flooding of public and private property and in accordance with applicable regulations for disposing non-stormwater discharges into the storm drainage system. Trap and remove sediment from water discharged during dewatering. Pump or drain discharged water into existing drainage systems. Any water contaminated with sewage shall be pumped into a sanitary sewer system unless otherwise required by regulations. Obtain applicable permits prior to discharging water if necessary, and furnish copies in an informational submittal.





TOPSOIL

Replace Paragraph 1201.2.1 General with the following paragraph.

1201.2.1 General. The thickness of topsoil shall be as shown on the plans or specified in the pay item.

Planting areas shall be free of weeds and other extraneous materials to a depth of 6 inches below finish

grade before topsoil work. Soil shall not be worked when it is so wet or so dry as to cause excessive

compaction or the forming of hard clods or dust.

Replace Paragraph 1201.7.a Topsoil with the following paragraph.

1201.7.a Topsoil furnished, placed and accepted will be measured by the square yard at the specified

thickness in place in locations shown on the Drawings or in locations designated by the Engineer.

In paragraph 1201.9 BASIS OF PAYMENT, replace Item No. 1201(1) with the following Item No. 1201(1).

Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit

1201(1) Topsoil (__” Thick) Square Yard





MOBILIZATION

Replace the portion of Section 1202.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT after the payment schedule with the following

paragraph.

Completion of the following work is required for payment of the first 25 percent of the schedule of

values price. No partial payment of Mobilization will be made until the first 25 percent is earned.

1. Providing an acceptable Baseline Schedule as specified in Section 4310 Construction Scheduling

2. Providing acceptable preconstruction photographs and video recordings as specified in Section

4322 Photographic Documentation

3. Providing all Contractor Signs in place as specified in Section 4580 Project Identification Signs





MANHOLE BYPASS PUMPING

Replace Section 2200.3.9 with the following Section 2200.3.9.

2200.3.9 Manhole Bypass Pumping Operations. Provide continuous sewer service to users of sewer

systems while maintenance or construction operations are in progress by diverting flow around

construction locations. Maintain sewer flow to prevent backup or overflow onto streets, yards and

other unpaved areas, and into buildings, ditches, storm drains and waterways. Do not divert sewage

outside of the sanitary sewer system. The bypass shall be made by plugging lines at an upstream

manhole and pumping the sewer flow into a downstream manhole or an adjacent sewer system.

Provide and operate the necessary systems including bulkheads, plugs, hoses, piping, pumps and special

features where pipes or hoses cross roadways and driveways.

Contractor shall identify and provide systems with sufficient capacity to maintain average and peak flow

rates. Where flow rates of 1,500 GPM or higher are anticipated, provide a separate emergency bypass

pumping system on site and ready for immediate startup. When pumps are operating, provide an

experienced operator on site to monitor operation, adjust pumps, prevent clogging, make minor repairs

to the system, and report problems. When a bypass pumping system is scheduled to operate 5 days or

longer, provide a monitoring system capable of remote notification of high level conditions and pump

failures. The monitoring system shall include a cellular telephone based notification system capable of

remote communications with Contractor and City representatives. Provide 24‐hour “on call” service

with capability to provide onsite service within 2 hours of notification.

For systems that bypass sanitary sewer line segments 15 inches in diameter and larger, develop and

submit a manhole bypass pumping plan to demonstrate that the proposed pumping system has

sufficient capacity for average and peak flows at each location. The Engineer may furnish information

on anticipated flow rates when available, for the Contractor’s use in properly sizing each component of

the system. The Contractor is responsible for providing systems with adequate capacity for each

manhole bypass pumping operation.

Provide piping, joints and accessories to withstand at least twice the maximum system pressure or 50

psi, whichever is greater. In the event of an accidental leakage, spill or overflow, take immediate action

to clean up and disinfect the discharge. Promptly notify the City Field Operations Center or Dispatch

Office (318‐673‐7600) and follow the required documenting and reporting procedures to assure that

EPA is properly notified in a timely manner.

Maintain all manhole bypass pumping operations within public and/or dedicated right‐of‐way. Provide

additional signs and barricades as necessary to protect the public as well as the Work for the duration of

the operations. Provide silenced equipment with sufficient noise abatement systems to mitigate sound

and meet requirements of City regulations for noise and sound levels.

2200.3.9.1 Flow. Public Landing Lift Station has a hydraulic model peak hourly flow (2‐year storm) of

1,957 gpm. The total dynamic head is estimated to be 49 feet.



2200.3.9.2 Location of upstream manhole and force main bypass connection. The upstream manhole

is located at 727,030 North and 2,864,073 East. The force main bypass connection is located at 727,063

North and 2,894,104 East.





WET WELL LINING SYSTEMS Replace Section 2220 MONOLITHIC MANHOLE LINING SYSTEMS with the following Section 2220 WET WELL LINING SYSTEM

2220.1 GENERAL. This specification may include wet well liner systems that may not apply to all projects. Contractor shall install a wet well liner system as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2220.2 SCOPE OF WORK. The Contractor shall coat concrete wetwells as shown and specified within the Contract Documents using a Multi-Component Stress Panel Lining System, as directed by the Engineer.

This section covers all workmanship, materials and quality requirements for rehabilitation and lining work on the interior surfaces of wetwells. Contractor shall provide and apply resurfacing and lining materials as specified and as indicated on drawings and per manufacturer's instructions and design details.

Lining shall be applied to all interior surfaces of the wet well, wet well access manhole and basket screen structure including ceiling/roof (not including hatches) and walls. The lining system shall be terminated per manufacturer’s recommendations at the floor of the structures.

2220.3 REFERENCE. This section contains references to the documents listed below. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the more stringent of the requirements shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of receipt of Bids. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced.

Referenced publications found within this specification shall be the latest revision unless otherwise specified; and applicable parts of the referenced publications shall become a part of this specification as if fully included.

AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)

ACI 308.1 Guide to Curing Concrete

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)



ANSI/ASC Z9.4 Exhaust Systems Abrasive Blasting Operations Ventilation and Safe Practices for Fixed Location Enclosures

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens)

ASTM C348 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars

ASTM C403 Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Concrete Mixtures by Penetration Resistance

ASTM C496 Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C666 Standard Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

ASTM C868 Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Protective Linings

ASTM D412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension

ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness

ASTM D3960 Standard Practice for Determining Volitile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings

ASTM D4060 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser

ASTM D4259 Standard Practice for Abrading Concrete



ASTM D4263 Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method

ASTM D4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers

ASTM E337 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer (the Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Temperatures)

ASTM F1869 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride

ASTM F710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Surfaces to Receive Resilient Flooring

U.S GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION

F 595B Federal Standard Colors

INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE (ICRI)

ICRI Guideline No. 03732 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Coatings, Sealers, and Polymer Overlays

NACE INTERNATIONAL (NACE)

NACE Pub. 6D-173 A Manual for Painter Safety

NACE Pub. 6F-163 Surface Preparation of Steel or Concrete Tank Interiors

NACE Pub. 6G-164 Surface Preparation Abrasives for Industrial Maintenance Painting



NACE Pub. TPC2 Coatings and Linings for Immersion Service

NACE RP0288 Inspection of Linings on Steel and Concrete

NACE RP0892 Coatings and Linings over Concrete for Chemical Immersion and Containment Service

NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates

SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

SSPC-SP12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High- and Ultra High- Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating

SSPC-SP13 Surface Preparation of Concrete

SSPC-Guide 12 Guide for Illumination of Industrial Painting Project

OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA)

OSHA 1915.35 Painting

OSHA- 29 CFR 1926.651 Specific Excavation Requirements

Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 2220.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE.

1. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, or diluted materials. Do not use materials from

previously opened containers.

2. Use only products by approved manufacturers. All materials must be compatible. Provide same material product for touch-up as for original material.

3. If any requirements of this specification conflict with a referenced standard, the more stringent requirement shall apply.



4. Make available all locations and phases of the work for access by the City and the Engineer or other personnel designated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide ventilation and egress to safely access the coating work areas for inspection.

5. Conduct work so that the system is installed as specified herein. Inspect work continually to ensure that the system is installed as specified herein. The Contractor shall inspect the work to determine conformance with the specifications and referenced documents. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of the progress and the quality of the work through daily reports as specified below. Any nonconforming lining system work shall be corrected as specified herein or as recommended by the manufacturer.

6. Summarize test data, work progress, areas covered, ambient conditions, quality control inspection test findings, and other information pertinent to the system installation in daily reports to be submitted to the Engineer.

7. Applicators shall have at least five years of experience performing lining work of similar size and complexity as the work specified in this Section and with the materials that are being used. Applicators shall be certified or approved by the lining system manufacturer. Submittals to verify these qualifications are to be made within thirty (30) days of the Notice- to-Proceed and are subject to approval by the Engineer.

2220.5 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS. Furnish submittals in accordance with City of Shreveport Standard Specifications.

Submit the following prior to commencing with any phase of the work covered by this Section:

1. Manufacturer's current printed recommendations and product data sheets for all lining system products supplied under this section including performance criteria, surface preparation and applications, volatile organic compound (VOC) data, and safety requirements.

2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for any materials brought on-site including all resurfacing system materials, solvents, and abrasive blast media.

3. Storage requirements including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for resurfacing system materials.

4. Manufacturer's requirements, including application procedures for resurfacing materials shall be in writing and shall be followed in detail. All safety precautions recommended by the manufacturer shall be strictly adhered to at all times when work is in progress.

5. Submit applicators' certification that resurfacing materials comply with Federal, State, and Local regulations for VOC.

6. Submit daily reports that contain the following information: Substrate conditions, ambient conditions, application procedures, work completed and location thereof. Mark-up drawings that show location of work.

7. Submit letter(s) with associated product data signed by manufacturer certifying that submitted products are suitable for application on the surfaces to be resurfaced and for the



service conditions.

2220.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE. Materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and adverse temperature conditions. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer shall be removed from the site.

Store all materials only in area or areas designated by the Engineer solely for this purpose. Confine mixing, thinning, clean-up and associated operations, and storage of materials-related debris before authorized disposal, to these areas. All materials are to be stored on pallets or similar storage/handling skids off the ground in sheltered areas

in which the temperature is maintained between 50oF and 90oF or as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

Mix all materials in an enclosed mixing area. This enclosed area must protect the mixing operation and materials from direct sunlight, inclement weather, freezing, or other means of damage or contamination. Protect all other concrete and metallic surfaces and finishes from any spillage of material(s) within the mixing area. Do not use floor drains, dikes or storm drains for disposal of any materials.

The Contractor shall take all precautions and implement all measures necessary to avert potential hazards associated with the resurfacing system materials as described on the pertinent MSDS or container labels. Deliver all materials to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer's name and label.

Labels on all material containers must show the following information:

1. Name or title of product.

2. Federal Specification Number if applicable.

3. Manufacturer's batch number and date of manufacture.

4. Manufacturer's name.

5. Generic type of material.

6. Application and mixing instructions.

7. Hazardous material identification label.

8. Shelf life date.

9. Storage requirements.

All containers shall be clearly marked indicating any personnel safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to the materials. All materials shall be handled and stored to prevent damage or loss of label. Material storage and mixing areas shall be designated by the Engineer. Do not use or retain contaminated, outdated, prematurely opened,



diluted materials, or materials which have exceeded their shelf life.

2220.7 COORDINATION OF WORK. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer regarding availability of work areas, completion times, safety, access, and other factors which can impact plant operations.

2220.8 SAFETY. The Contractor’s work forces should comply with the provisions outlined int eh following documents:

1. SSPC-PA-3 - "A Guide to Safety in Paint Application"

2. NACE Pub. 6D-173 - "A Manual for Painter Safety" The Contractor shall provide personnel with all safety equipment necessary to protect them during any phase of the work. This shall include, but not be limited to safety glasses, goggles, earplugs, hard hats, steel toed work shoes, appropriate personal protective clothing, gloves, and plant approved escape respirators (where required).

No work shall be performed until the appropriate Work Requests and lock-outs have been submitted to the Engineer. The Work Request system provides a mechanism to advise plant staff of a Contractor's work activities. The Lockout system is a safety procedure to prevent unintended equipment activation.

Keep any flammable materials such as cleaning solvents, thinners, or resurfacing materials away from open flames, sparks or temperatures higher than 150oF. Drums containing flammable materials shall be grounded. No solvent in any quantity shall be allowed inside containment enclosures or permitted confined spaces at any time during resurfacing work.

Power tools are to be in good working order to avoid open sparking. No spark producing tools shall be utilized in restricted areas as indicated herein.

The Contractor shall fireproof all work areas by maintaining a clean work area and having Underwriter's Laboratories approved fire extinguishers on-hand. The Contractor shall furnish these fire extinguishers.

Complete the disposal process at the end of each day. Final disposal of these materials is the Contractor's responsibility.

Matches, smoking, flames, or sparks resulting from any source including welding, must be remote from the work area during coating work.

2220.9 SITE CONDITIONS.

1. Air and Surface Temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within air and surface temperature range in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Relative Humidity: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within relative humidity range in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Precipitation: Do not prepare surfaces or apply coatings in rain, snow, fog, or mist.

4. Wind: Do not spray coatings if wind velocity causes overspray of the coating materials. Contractor shall be responsible for rectifying all overspray claims.



2220.10 MANUFACTURERS. Materials specified are those that have been evaluated for the specific service. Products shall be as manufactured by CCI Spectrum, Inc., or approved equal. As part of the proof of equality, the Engineer shall require, at the cost of the Contractor, certified test reports from a nationally known, reputable, and independent testing laboratory conducting comparative tests as directed by the Engineer between the product specified and the requested substitution. Requests for substitutions shall include manufacturer's literature for each product giving name, product number, and generic type, descriptive information, solids by volume, recommended dry film thickness and certified lab test reports showing results to equal the performance criteria of the products specified herein.

In addition, a list of five projects shall be submitted in which each product has been used and rendered satisfactory service.

2220.11 MATERIALS.

2220.11.1 Multi-Component Stress Panel Liner System.

1. The following list specifies the material requirements for multi-component stress panel liner systems. The approved products are as follows:

Moisture Barrier and Final Corrosion Barrier: Spectrashield, or approved equal.

2. Shall be a sprayable, solvent free, two-component polymeric, moisture/chemical barrier specifically developed for the corrosive wastewater environment – with the following typical chemical analysis:

“A” Component

Viscosity, 77° F, cps., 300-400

Physical State Liquid

Color Clear to amber

Hygroscopicity Reacts with

water B” Component



Color Flamingo Pink

Non-Volatile 100%

REACTION PROFILE (100 grams, 175° F sample) Gel Time, seconds 1-2 Tack Free Time, seconds 15 Cure Time, seconds 30 A System / B System, volume ratio 1.00 / 1.00

TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES



Tensile Strength (PSI) ASTM D412 2670 Elongation (%) ASTM D412 430 100% Modulus ASTM D412 2200 300 % Modulus ASTM D412 2600 Tear Strength (PLI) ASTM D2240 280 Hardness (shore D ) ASTM D1737 42 Flashpoint (°F) ASTM Pensky-Martens >200 Taber Abrasion (mg loss) ASTM D4060 25

3. Surfacer: Spectrashield, or approved equal, Polyurethane Rigid Structure Foam

Typical Chemical Analysis:

“A” Component

Viscosity, 77° F, cps., 200


Color Dark Brown

Hygroscopicity Reacts with water and evolves CO2 gas

“B” Component



Color Tan

Hygroscopicity Absorbs water rapidly thus changing ratio

REACTION PROFILE (100 GRAMS, 77° F SAMPLE)

Cream Time, seconds 1-4

Tack Free time, seconds 5-8

Rise Time, seconds 6-10

Processing

A System / B System, volume ratio 1.00 / 1.00

4. If dry or wet abrasive blast cleaning is the selected method of surface preparation, provide slag grit of a sieve size, gradation, and quality necessary to produce the degree of cleanliness and surface profile required herein.

2220.12 EXECUTION.

2220.12.1 General.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the cleanup of the wetwell, including disposal of wastes, sludge, debris, deposits, etc.



Hoisting, Scaffolding, Staging, and Planking:

1. Provide, set-up, and maintain all required hoists, scaffolds, and staging and planking, and perform all access related hoisting work required to complete the work of this section as indicated and specified.

2. Scaffolds shall have solid backs and floors to prevent dropping materials from there to the floors or ground below.

Environmental Requirements:

1. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which materials can be applied.

2. Do not apply materials when dust is in work site.

3. The Contractor shall provide all temporary lighting during the work.

Protection:

1. Cover or otherwise protect finish work or other surfaces not being lined.

2. Erect and maintain protective tarps, enclosures and/or maskings to contain debris (such as dust or airborne particles resulting from surface preparation) generated during any and all work activities. This includes, but is not limited to, the use of dust/debris collection apparatus as required.

Initial Inspection of Surfaces to be lined:

1. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inspect and report unacceptable concrete substrate surface conditions to the Engineer prior to the commencement of surface preparation activities.

2. Unacceptable concrete surface conditions are defined as the presence of water infiltration/inflow, cracked surfaces or concrete deteriorated to a depth of greater than one (1”) inch or otherwise unable to withstand surface preparation as specified herein.

3. Verify that the pH of the cleaned concrete surfaces to be coated is within a range acceptable to the lining manufacturer. Application of coating materials outside this range shall not be permitted without written approval from the Engineer.

4. Unacceptable steel or ductile/cast iron surface conditions are defined as severely corroded and/or perforated metals and are unable to withstand surface preparation as specified herein.



Thinners and Solvents:

1. The Contractor shall use only solvents and thinners as recommended by the Manufacturer.

2220.13. APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR LINING SYSTEM.

General.

1. Areas not to be lined shall be masked using duct tape or other protection materials to prevent these surfaces from being resurfaced.

2. Ensure straight even termination of resurfacing/topcoat materials on wall edges and flush with embedded steel.

3. The Contractor must follow the minimum and maximum recoat limitation times and related temperature range restrictions between successive lifts for all products specified herein per Manufacturer's stated requirements.

4. All equipment and procedures used for lining system application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

5. Unless specified elsewhere herein, the Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's most recent written instructions with respect to the following:

a. Mixing of All Materials.

b. Protection and Handling of All Materials.

c. Recoat Limitation and Cure Times.

d. Minimum Ambient and Substrate Temperatures, Substrate's Degree of Dryness, Relative Humidity, and Dew Point of Air.

e. Application.

f. Final Curing.

g. Use of Proper Application Equipment.

h. Curing of Resurfacing System.

The applied resurfacing system shall be protected from damage during curing and shall be cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Ambient conditions shall be controlled by the Contractor during the curing period to ensure that minimum air temperature and minimum relative humidity as required by the manufacturer is maintained.



2220.14 SURFACE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR MULTI-COMPONENT STRESS PANEL LINER SYSTEM.

All specified surface preparation shall be performed in accordance with the latest version of the SSPC, NACE, ICRI and other standards referenced in this section.

Corroded concrete surfaces shall be repaired to their original condition. Allow new concrete to cure a minimum of 28 days. Contractor may verify dryness by testing for moisture with a “plastic film tape down test.” (Reference ASTM D 4263). If necessary for testing horizontal surfaces, Calcium Chloride test in accordance with ASTM F1869. If test results indicate moisture levels outside the acceptable range of the manufacturer, contact the manufacturer. Do not proceed with the coating application.

Prior to applying first layer, all existing areas that are scheduled to receive the chemical resistant lining shall be hydro-blasted using a minimum of 20,000 psi. Mechanically abrade all surfaces to be coated to remove laitance, curing compounds sealer and other contaminants and to produce a minimum surface profile equal to ICRI CSP 5 (medium-heavy shotblast). Reference SSPC-SP13.

Cleaning and resurfacing shall be scheduled so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process shall not fall on wet, newly resurfaced areas.

Cleaning / Surface Preparation:

All existing areas to be resurfaced shall be hydro-blasted with at least 20,000 psi to remove all loose materials, acid constituents, grease, oil, and other contaminants. Structures six feet (6’) in diameter or greater, and those with large flat walls shall use a 40,000 psi hydro-blaster to achieve the desired anchoring profile.

2220.15 INSTALLATION OF MULTI-COMPONENT STRESS PANEL LINER SYSTEM.

Apply Moisture Barrier (Spectrashield, or approved equal). This layer of polyurea shall be spray applied at a nominal thickness of 70 mils to all surfaces one foot below the low flow line. Mechanical anchoring system shall be embedded and sprayed into the liner at all infiltration locations and at all wall/floor termination.

Apply Surfacer (Spectrashield, or approved equal). This layer of polyurethane rigid structure foam shall be spray applied to all surfaces previously lined with the moisture barrier. This layer shall be applied at a nominal thickness of 440 mils. This layer may be thicker depending on the condition of the substrate.

Apply Final Corrosion Barrier (Spectrashield, or approved equal) to all surfaces lined with the Surfacing layer shall be spray applied at a nominal thickness of 80 mils in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2220.16 SAFETY AND VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS.

Requirements for safety and ventilation shall be in accordance with SSPC Paint Application Guide No. 3.



2220.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL INSPECTION.

Inspection by the Engineer or others does not limit the Contractor's responsibilities for quality control inspection and testing as specified herein or as required by the Manufacturer's instructions.

Perform the quality control procedures listed below in conjunction with the requirements of this Section. Inspect all materials upon receipt to ensure that all are supplied by the manufacturer.

Provide specified storage conditions for the resurfacing system materials, solvents, and abrasives.

Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern). Surfaces shall be abraded, as a minimum, equal to the roughness of 40 grit sand paper.

Measure and record ambient air temperature once every two hours of each shift using a thermometer and measure and record substrate temperature once every two hours using a surface thermometer.

Measure and record relative humidity every two hours of each shift using a sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337.

Provide correct mixing of resurfacing materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Inspect

and record that the "pot life" of resurfacing materials are not exceeded during installation. Verify curing of the

resurfacing materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Upon completion of the lining system installation the lined area shall be cleaned and prepared to permit close visual inspection by the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative. Any and all deficiencies or defective work (not in compliance with this section or related sections) shall be marked for repair or removal/replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City.

2220.18 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA.

Acceptance criteria for surface preparation work:

All surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with the specification and referenced standards therein. Acceptance

Criteria for coating system application work:

Acceptable coating work shall be based upon the following:

1. No pock-marks, trowel marks, depressions, unconsolidated areas, pinholes or holidays in either size or frequency.

2. No intercoat bond failures between lifts.



3. Proper curing of coatings.

4. Resurfaced areas shall pitch to drains. There shall be no areas that puddle when flood tested.

5. The Engineer or Engineer's Representative shall, at their discretion, inspect the following:

a. Profile and degree of cleanliness of substrate.

b. Thickness of materials/coverage rate confirmation.

c. Ambient temperature and humidity requirements and substrate temperature.

d. Curing and recoat times.

e. Proper curing of the lining materials.

6. Rework required on any holidays or any other inadequacies found by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative in the quality of the coating work shall be marked. Such areas shall be recleaned and reworked by the Contractor according to these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations at no additional cost to the City.

7. The Contractor is responsible for keeping the Engineer informed of all progress so that inspection for quality can be achieved.

8. The Contractor is ultimately responsible for the quality performance of the applied materials and workmanship. Inspections by the Engineer or the Engineer's Representative do not limit this responsibility.

2220.19 FINAL INSPECTION.

Perform a final inspection to determine whether the resurfacing system work meets the requirements of the specifications. The Engineer and the Engineer's Representative shall conduct final inspection with the Contractor.

2220.20 CLEANUP.

Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, equipment, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish, and thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any work-related damage. The surrounding surface areas including roadways and all other surfaces shall be restored to their pre-project condition.

2220.21 WARRANTY.

The Contractor shall provide a minimum written five year warranty against failures. Failure includes any blistering, cracking or loss of adhesion of the coating to the existing concrete substrate. The coating system should not be damaged by any debris that enters the wet well. The warranty period shall start on the date of Final Completion.





GRAVITY SEWER PIPE AND MANHOLE TESTING

Replace the first and second paragraphs of Section 2300.4.1 Leakage Tests for Gravity Sewers with the

following paragraphs.

2300.4.1 Leakage Tests for Gravity Sewers. All new sewer mains without reconnections to existing service

laterals shall successfully pass low pressure air testing. All pipe installed by pipe bursting shall successfully

pass low pressure air testing before reinstatement of service lateral connections. Provide 24 hours

advance notice of testing to the Engineer and perform leakage tests in the presence of the Resident

Project Representative.

Flush and clean each section of gravity sewer main before testing and install suitable test plugs to isolate

the section.

Replace Section 2300.4.3 Deflection Testing for Flexible Gravity Sewer Pipe with the following paragraphs.

2300.4.3 Deflection Testing for Flexible Gravity Sewer Pipe. Deflection testing with an approved “Go‐No Go” mandrel is required for flexible pipes with nominal diameters of 8 inches and larger. Utilize a rigid mandrel constructed of metal or rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. Mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as total number of legs is odd number. Barrel section of mandrel shall have a length of at least 75 percent of inside diameter of pipe. Rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. Provide and use a proving ring for checking and modifying each size mandrel. Proving ring shall be fabricated of one half‐inch thick, 3‐inch wide bar steel to diameter 0.02 inch larger than approved mandrel diameter.

Rigid mandrel shall have outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95 percent of inside diameter (I.D.) of pipe. Inside diameter of pipe, for purpose of determining outside diameter of mandrel, shall be average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe. Dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing.

Perform deflection testing no sooner than 30 days after completion of backfilling pipe, but prior to final inspection. Pull the approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections from manhole to manhole. Any portion of the pipeline with a deflection in excess of 5 percent shall be rejected. Remove all rejected pipe and replace it with new pipe, bedding and backfill in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the City.

Replace the first two paragraphs of Section 2300.4.5 with the following paragraphs.

2300.4.5 Alignment Testing and Quality Checking of Gravity Sewer Pipe. The Contractor shall check all

new gravity sewer pipes for quality work and alignment by cleaning and testing as specified in Section

2000.3.7.



For gravity sewer pipes installed by open cut methods or inside a casing, the maximum allowable vertical

variation in the final position of the pipe from the grade shown on the Drawings is ¼ inch per 10 linear

feet of pipe.

For gravity sewer pipes installed by augering without a casing, the maximum allowable sag or hump is 25

percent of the nominal inside pipe diameter. Gravity sewer pipe with more than one sag or hump per

reach or more than on sag or hump between manholes is unacceptable. The maximum allowable bow

or horizontal variation in the final position of the pipe from the alignment shown on the Drawings is 50

percent of the nominal inside pipe diameter.

Replace Section 2300.4.6 Testing of Rehabilitated Sewers and Manholes with the following paragraph.

2300.4.6 Not Used.

Replace Section 2300.5.1 Leakage Tests for Gravity Sewers with the following paragraph.

2300.5.1 Leakage Test for Gravity Sewers. Perform air testing for applicable gravity sewer mains as

specified herein. If the test fails, the Contractor shall correct the defective material and/or installation

and repeat the test until it is successful. Payment shall be included in the pay items for Gravity Sewer Main

and Piping Laid by Pipe Bursting.

Replace Section 2300.5.3 Vacuum Test for Manholes with the following paragraph.

2300.5.3 Vacuum Test for Manholes. Perform vacuum testing for new manholes and existing manholes

with a monolithic lining system as specified herein. If the test fails, the Contractor shall correct the

defective material and/or installation and repeat the test until it is successful. Payment shall be included

in the pay items for Sanitary Sewer Manhole and Monolithic Manhole Lining System.


ISSUED FOR BID



PACKAGED SUBMERSIBLE LIFT STATION

Replace Section 2800 PACKAGED SUBMERSIBLE LIFT STATIONS with the following Section 2800 PACKAGED SUBMERSIBLE LIFT STATIONS

2800.1 GENERAL. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install, place in operation and field test a submersible duplex packaged lift station as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. The submersible lift station shall comprise of precast wetwell, submersible solids handling pumps, motors, guide rails, access hatches, valves, control panels, control systems, lift station enclosure, float meters, starters, relays, PLC, lights, and appurtenances as specified herein.

2800.2 REFERENCES. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. The most recent version of the references shall apply.

AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

AWWA C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water.

AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3-in

Through 48-in (75mm Through 1200mm) for Water and Other Liquids.

AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron

or Gray-Iron Threaded Flanges.

AWWA C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water and Other Liquids.

AWWA C500 Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply

Service.

AWWA C508 Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-in (50mm) Through 24-in (600mm) NPS.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.

SSPC-SP6 Surface Preparation Specification No. 6

Commercial Blast Cleaning.

American Bearing Manufacturer’s Association (ABMA) American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Hydraulics Institute (HI)

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


Joint Industrial Council Standards (JIC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

2800.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE. To assure unity of responsibility, all the equipment specified herein shall be furnished by a single pump station manufacturer and shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment for over ten (10) years. The pump station manufacturer shall have the sole responsibility for the proper installation, operation, and functioning of the complete packaged pumping station, including, but not limited to, the pumps, motors, starters, and controls.

The pumps and other equipment covered by this Specification shall be standard production units of the manufacturers, currently available and listed in the respective manufacturer's catalog. The pumps furnished shall be in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute Standards and shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed.

Controls shall not be assembled on site. System supplier shall be a UL 508 certified facility and shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of controls for the municipal industry. The system specified herein shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer having at least ten (10) years’ successful experience in the manufacturing, installation, and servicing of such system equipment specified herein.

2800.4 SUBMITTALS. The contractor shall provide submittals as specified in Section 4300 Submittals.

Shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions and anchor bolt installation requirements. Submittal shall demonstrate that hatch clear opening is sufficient for the pump supplied.

Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. Sufficient data shall be submitted to document previous production of each pump model proposed for use on this Contract.

Data on the characteristics and performance of each pump. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves based on actual factory tests of similar units, which show that they meet the specified requirements for head, flow rate, efficiency, NPSHr, submergence, brake horsepower, and input KW based upon actual field tests on the pumps provided. Curves shall be submitted on 8-1/2- inch by 11-inch sheets, at as large a scale as is practical. Curves shall be plotted from no flow at shut off head to pump capacity at minimum specified TDH. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves will not be acceptable.

Structural calculations indicating that the wetwell, valve vault, and other precast structures can adequately withstand all applicable loads, stresses, and buoyancy. These calculations shall be performed and sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the state of Louisiana.

The total weight of the equipment including the weight of the single largest item.

Complete master wiring diagrams and elementary or control schematics of all power and control systems (including other electrical control devices operating in conjunction with the submersible pump system) showing wiring requirements between all system components, motors, sensors, control panels and related systems shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture. Standard pre-printed sheets or drawings simply marked to indicate applicability to this contract will not be acceptable.

Complete motor data, including, but not limited to:

1. Type of enclosure design

2. Rated horsepower

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


3. Rated voltage

4. Full Load Amps (FLA)

5. Starting current

6. Locked Rotor Amperes (LRA)

7. Locked Rotor Kilo Volt Amperes (LR KVA)

8. NEMA starting code letter and insulation code letter

9. RPM

10. Input power in kW at nameplate rating

11. Starting calculations

12. Cable size

13. Efficiency at 50%, 75% & 100% load, and power factor at 50%, 75% & 100% load

14. Speed torque curves

15. Recommended trip and alarm settings for temperature protective devices

A complete, total bill of materials of all equipment.

A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts (also see section 2800.5 of this specification), with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, seals, etc. on the list. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only.

Certified agreement to the conditions of the warranty. Submit description of factory test plan including test procedures and equipment. Submit for approval certified test reports of factory testing and field testing.

Provide a waterproof reduced scale copy of the record master wiring diagram which shall be laminated in clear plastic and permanently fastened to the inside of the panel door.

In the event that the equipment offered does not conform to all of the detailed requirements of this specification, describe completely all nonconforming aspects. Failure to describe any and all deviations from the specifications will be cause for rejection. Should the Contractor provide a submittal that would require modification to the design, to a structure, hydraulic piping, electrical components, layout, controls, or other previously designed aspects of the project, he shall submit with his transmittal, additional design calculations and details of the modification. Any cost incurred by the Engineer for review of these modifications and the direct effect on other designed portions of the project and the implementation of alternate designs shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Engineer will incur no additional costs for modifications or deviations from the original drawings and specifications as submitted by shop drawings, product data, or samples.

2800.5 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS. The contractor shall provide the following tools and spare parts:

Provide one set of all special tools as required for the proper servicing of equipment specified. Provide one complete set of the manufacturer's standard set of spare parts, including at least the following spare parts for the pumping units.

1. Two complete sets of both radial and thrust bearings

2. Two shaft sleeves with keys, nuts and accessories

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


3. Two complete sets of wearing rings

4. Two sets of packing glands and pump seals complete with rings, nuts and bolts

5. Two sets of gaskets for each casing joint

6. Two sets of all special bolts, nuts and screws

7. One completely assembled rotating assembly

The following spare parts shall be furnished for the electrical system.

1. One box of control power fuses of each size furnished.

2. Two complete sets of starter contacts for every starter of each NEMA size installed.

3. Four starter coils for every starter of each NEMA size installed, if applicable.

4. Two sets of overload relay heaters of every size furnished, if applicable.

5. Two boxes of pilot lights.

Collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated by the City. Furnish the Engineer with an inventory, listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivery cost.

Spare parts shall be packed in cartons, properly labeled with indelible markings with complete descriptive information including manufacturer, part number, part name and equipment for which the part is to be used and shall be properly treated for one year of storage.

2800.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide five (5) hard copies and one electronic copy of Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for equipment furnished and installed on this contract and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, programming and controls descriptions, etc. that are required to instruct operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment.

The Contractor shall include in his bid price the services of the equipment supplier’s authorized representative for two (2) separate site visits. The duration of these visits shall be as necessary to accomplish the following work. The first site visit shall be to inspect for proper installation, testing the installed equipment, and assisting the City during start-up.

The second site visit shall be to instruct the City’s personnel for proper operation and maintenance of the pumps, valves and associated controls. Two separate training sessions shall be provided to accommodate the City’s personnel work schedules. The Contractor shall coordinate testing, startup and instruction sessions between the City and the equipment supplier/manufacturer. If there are difficulties with the proper operation of the equipment additional services shall be immediately provided to correct such difficulties at no additional cost to the City.

2800.7 WARRANTY. The manufacturer of the pump station shall guarantee it to be of quality construction, free from defects in material and workmanship for a minimum of two (2) years from the date of final completion.

The interior equipment, apparatus, and parts furnished shall be guaranteed for a period of two (2) years, excepting only those items that are normally consumed in service, such as light bulbs, oil, grease, packing,

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


gaskets, O-rings, etc. The lift station manufacturer shall be solely responsible for the guarantee of the station and all components.

Major components, such as station structure, pumps, pump motors, etc., failing to perform as specified; or as represented by the manufacturer; or proven defective in service during the guarantee period, shall be replaced, repaired or satisfactorily modified by the manufacturer at no additional cost to the City. In addition to the warranty as stated above, the supplier of the pump and control system shall guarantee clog-free operation for a period of 24 months from the date of final completion. A certificate of guarantee shall be provided to the City at final completion with the local contact information and effective date. Should the impeller clog with typical solids and/or modern trash debris normally found in domestic wastewater during the 24-month period, an authorized representative of the supplier shall immediately travel to the lift station site to remove the pump, clear the obstruction, and reinstall the pump at no additional cost to the City. Should the supplier not provide the foregoing service, the supplier shall reimburse the City for any and all reasonable costs to provide said services. A written report shall be provided to the City detailing the service call with pictures for verification purposes.

2800.8 PRODUCTS. The material specified herein is intended to be standard equipment of proven ability and as manufactured by reputable concerns having experience in the production of such equipment.

The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with best practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. It is implied that all named products and materials listed herein shall include “or approved equal” at the end of each reference.

All equipment shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the intended service. All equipment and piping shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed. All bolts, nuts, washers and other appurtenances shall be of 316 stainless steel unless otherwise specifically noted elsewhere.

2800.8.1 Wetwell. Wetwell shall be in compliance with the current revisions of the Great Lakes – Upper Mississippi River Board’s recommended standards, and Title 51, part XIII of the State of Louisiana’s Sanitary Code. Wetwell shall be precast concrete, circular in shape with a minimum diameter of 6 feet. Wetwell sizing, and associated clearances shall comply with the most recent version of the Hydraulic Institute (HI) standards.

The base slab of the wetwell shall be minimum 8 inches thick. The base of the wet well shall be grouted at the joints on the inside at a 1:1 slope to prevent the accumulation of solids. The wetwell invert shall also be wide enough to include adequate clearances between the pumps, and between the pump and the wall as detailed in the Hydraulic Institute Intake standards.

The wetwell cover shall be minimum 4 inches thick and shall consist of an opening of adequate dimensions to permit easy access/removal of pumps for maintenance. Access opening shall be a minimum of 24-inches in diameter or dimension. Additional wetwell access openings may be required as shown on the drawings. Aluminum access hatches capable of withstanding up to 300 psf live load shall be installed on the access opening. Access hatches shall be as manufactured by Halliday Products, Bilco or approved equal. The hatch frame and cover shall be flush with the top of the concrete complete with hinges and flush locking mechanism, upper guide holder and level sensor cable holder. Doors shall open and automatically lock with stainless steel “hold open” arm with aluminum release handles. Access hatches shall include a safety grate. An inverted “J” pipe or similar means for air ventilation shall be provided on the wetwell cover. The ventilation pipe shall be designed to allow an inflow of air at a rate equal to the maximum liquid pumping rate. Vent pipe shall be minimum 4-inches in diameter. Outside vent opening shall be furnished with a Type 316 stainless steel insect screen.

All seams, joints, openings and pipe penetrations shall be sealed watertight. Pipe penetrations shall be sealed using a modular seal as manufactured by Link-Seal or approved equal. Seals shall be made of suitable material

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


to withstand the contents normally found in sanitary wastewater.

Pipe penetration holes shall be sized to accommodate the piping along with the modular seal. The Contractor shall coat concrete wetwell as specified in Section 2810, Wetwell Lining System. The entire wet well shall be sealed on the outside with two part urethane asphalt applied to provide a dry film thickness of 20 mils.

2800.8.2 Pumps and Appurtenances.

2800.8.2.1 Submersible Pumps and Motors. Impeller shall be semi open vane, Contra block or N-impeller. Pump stations shall consist of a minimum of two pumps of the same size, each capable of handling the design peak hourly flow.

Pump operating conditions:

Pump Design: Submersible Self-cleaning Non-clog

Design Flow / Pump: 1600 gpm

Design TDH: 43 feet

Minimum Efficiency (Hydraulic) at 1600 gpm: 78%

Maximum NPSHre: 14 feet

Secondary Design Flow / Pump: 575 gpm

Secondary Design Flow / Pump: 32 feet

Minimum Efficiency (Hydraulic) at 575 gpm: 62%

Service Voltage: 230 Volt, 3 Phase

Pump Specific Energy: 195 kWh/US MG (60 HZ)

112 kWh/US MG (35 HZ)

Pump RPM: 1200 RPM

Pumps shall be supplied with a mating discharge connection and be capable of delivering the flow specified in the table above. Pump suction and discharge openings shall be minimum 4 inches in diameter. Discharge connections shall be 125 lb. ANSI standard flanges. All external bolts and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. The discharge connection elbow shall be permanently installed in the wet well along with the discharge piping. The pumps shall be non-clog, capable of handling or passing raw unscreened sewage with solids up to 3-inches in diameter, rags and other fibrous materials, heavy sludge, and other matter normally found in wastewater regardless pump operational speed. The pump and motor shall be non-overloading at any point on the curve. The pump, with its appurtenances and cable, shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of sixty-five (65) feet. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished by a machined metal to metal watertight contact. Sealing of the discharge interface with a diaphragm, O-ring, or profile gasket will not be acceptable. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the sump floor. The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices.

A. Pump Construction: Major pump components shall be of closed grain grey cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class

35B, with smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes or other irregularities. The lifting handle shall be of stainless steel. All exposed nuts or bolts shall be of stainless-steel construction. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumpage, other than stainless steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on the exterior of the pump.

B. Mating Surfaces: All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with nitrile rubber O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metal contact

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


between machined surfaces. This will result in controlled compression of nitrile rubber O-rings without requirement of a specific torque limit. Rectangular cross sectioned gaskets requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered as adequate or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, elliptical O-rings, grease or other devices shall be used.

C. Cable Entry Seal: The cable entry water seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall be comprised of dual cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed by the entry body containing a strain relief function, separate from the function of sealing the cable. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a stator lead sealing gland or terminal board, which shall isolate the motor interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered acceptable.

D. Motors: The pump motor shall have cooling characteristics suitable to permit continuous operation in a totally or partially submerged condition. The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, vertically mounted induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. Each motor shall include a leakage sensor and a high temperature sensor to detect moisture and high temperatures in the housing. The stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 180°C (356°F). The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at least 95%. The motor shall be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA MG1, Part 31. The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is not acceptable. The use of pins, bolts, screws or other fastening devices used to locate or hold the stator and that penetrate the stator housing are not acceptable. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty while handling pumped media of up to 104°F. The motor shall be capable of no less than 30 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum. Three thermal switches shall be embedded in the stator end coils, one per phase winding, to monitor the stator temperature. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection and shall be connected to the motor control panel.

The motor shall be suitable for 240 volt 3-Phase, 60 Hz with a service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific gravity) of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of +/- 10%. The motor shall be designed for continuous operation in up to a 40°C ambient and shall have a NEMA Class B maximum operating temperature rise of 80°C. A motor performance chart shall be provided upon request exhibiting curves for motor torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. The chart shall also include data on motor starting and no-load characteristics.

The motor shall not be overloaded beyond the nameplate rating at any point on the pump head capacity curve. The motor shaft shall be of adequate strength and stiffness for the service intended. Pump power cables shall be suitable for installation in Class 1, Division I, Group D applications, cable sizes shall conform to NEC requirements for pump motors. Cable entry to the pumps shall be designed for immersed service.

Motor horsepower shall be sufficient so that the pump is non-overloading throughout its entire performance curve, from shut-off to run-out. The motor and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet or greater.

In addition to the features specified under MOTOR, above, the premium efficiency motor rotor shall have end rings and rotor bars constructed of copper. The premium efficiency motor shall meet the efficiency levels specified in the IEC standard 60034-30 for international efficiency, Class IE3.

E. Motor Cable Junction Chamber: The junction chamber shall be sealed off from the stator housing and shall contain a terminal board for connection of power and pilot sensor cables using threaded compression type terminals. The use of wire nuts or crimp-type connectors is not acceptable. The motor and the pump shall be produced by the same manufacturer.

F. Cooling System: Each unit shall be provided with an integral motor cooling system. A stainless steel motor cooling jacket shall encircle the stator housing, providing for dissipation of motor heat regardless of the type of pump installation. An impeller, integral to the cooling system and driven by the pump shaft, shall provide the necessary circulation of the cooling liquid through the jacket. The cooling liquid shall

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


pass about the stator housing in the closed loop system in turbulent flow providing for superior heat transfer. The cooling system shall have one fill port and one drain port integral to the cooling jacket. The cooling system shall provide for continuous pump operation in liquid or ambient temperatures of up to 104°F (40°C). Operational restrictions at temperatures below 104°F are not acceptable. Fans, blowers or auxiliary cooling systems that are mounted external to the pump motor are not acceptable.

G. Thermal Sensors: Each pump motor stator shall incorporate three thermal switches, one per stator phase winding and be connected in series, to monitor the temperature of the motor. Should the thermal switches open, the motor shall stop and activate an alarm. A float switch shall be installed in the seal leakage chamber and will activate if leakage into the chamber reaches 50% chamber capacity, signaling the need to schedule an inspection. The thermal switches and float switch shall be connected to controller/VFD and shall be designed to be mounted in the pump control panel.

H. Pump Shaft: The pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft shall be an extension of the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The shaft shall be ASTM A479 S43100-T stainless steel. Shaft sleeves will not be acceptable.

I. Mechanical Seals: Each pump shall be provided with a positively driven dual, tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two seal sets, each having an independent spring. The lower primary seal, located between the pump and seal chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide ring. The upper secondary seal located between the seal chamber and the seal inspection chamber shall be a leakage-free seal. The upper seal shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide seal ring. The rotating seal ring shall have small back-swept grooves laser inscribed upon its face to act as a pump as it rotates, returning any fluid that should enter the dry motor chamber back into the lubricant chamber. All seal rings shall be individual solid sintered rings. Each seal interface shall be held in place by its own spring system. The seals shall not depend upon direction of rotation for sealing. Mounting of the lower seal on the impeller hub is not acceptable. Shaft seals without positively driven rotating members or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces are not acceptable. The seal springs shall be isolated from the pumped media to prevent materials from packing around them, limiting their performance.

J. Shaft Seal Lubrication: Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and shall provide capacity for lubricant expansion. The seal lubricant chamber shall have one drain and one inspection plug that are accessible from the exterior of the motor unit. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication.

K. Seal Leakage Chamber: A separate seal leakage chamber shall be provided so that any leakage that may occur past the upper, secondary mechanical seal will be captured prior to entry into the motor stator housing. Such seal leakage shall not contaminate the motor lower bearing. The leakage chamber shall be equipped with a float type switch that will signal if the chamber should reach 50% capacity.

L. Bearings: The integral pump/motor shaft shall rotate on two bearings. The motor bearings shall be sealed and permanently grease lubricated with high temperature grease. The upper motor bearing shall be a single ball type bearing to handle radial loads. The lower bearing shall be a two-row angular contact ball bearing to handle the thrust and radial forces. The ABMA minimum L-10 bearing life shall be 50,000 hours at any usable portion of the pump curve.

M. Impeller: The impeller shall be of Hard-IronTM (ASTM A-532 (Alloy III A) 25% chrome cast iron), dynamically balanced, semi-open, multi-vane, back swept, screw-shaped, non-clog design and shall be capable of passing rags and fibrous materials. The impeller leading edges shall be mechanically self-cleaned automatically upon each rotation as they pass across a spiral groove located on the volute suction allowing the pump to operate down to 50% speed without clogging. The leading edges of the impeller shall be hardened to Rc 60 and shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter normally found in wastewater. The screw shape of the impeller inlet shall provide an inducing effect for the handling of up to 5% sludge and rag-laden wastewater. The impeller to volute clearance shall be readily adjustable by the means of a single trim screw. The impeller shall be locked to the shaft, held by an impeller bolt and shall be coated with alkyd resin primer.

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


N. Volute: The pump volute shall be a single piece grey cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, non-concentric design with smooth passages of sufficient size to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified. The volute shall have a replaceable suction cover insert ring in which are cast spiral-shaped, sharp-edged groove(s). The spiral groove(s) shall provide trash release pathways and sharp edge(s) across which each impeller vane leading edge shall cross during rotation so to remain unobstructed. The insert ring shall be cast of Hard-IronTM (ASTM A-532 (Alloy III A) 25% chrome cast iron) and provide effective sealing between the multi-vane semi-open impeller and the volute housing.

O. Cable: The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The power cable shall be of a shielded design in which an overall tinned copper shield is included, and each individual phase conductor is shielded with an aluminum coated foil wrap. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chlorinated polyethylene rubber. The cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet or greater.

P. Lifting Assembly: The pumps shall be capable of being raised and lowered to and from their operating position by means of a hoist and guide bars and brackets. The pumps shall be automatically connected to the discharge connection elbow when lowered into place and shall be easily removed for inspection or service. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accomplished by a simple linear downward motion of the pump. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pump unit. The entire weight of the pump unit shall be guided by two (2) guide bars and pressed tightly against the discharge connection elbow with metal-to-metal contact. Sealing of the discharge interface by means of a diaphragm, O-ring, or other devices will not be acceptable. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor of the sump. The guide bars shall be 2" diameter fabricated from Schedule 40 Type 304 stainless steel pipe specifically manufactured for the purpose of guide bars for sewer pumps. The guide brackets shall be constructed of stainless steel. The intermediate guide bracket shall be installed at the midpoint of each guide bar. Each pump shall be furnished with sufficient length of Type 304 stainless steel lifting chain (1/4" diameter) to span from the pump to the wet well lid. One (1) stainless steel lifting eye shall be provided for each pump station.

Q. Paint: Pumps and motors shall be shop prepared and painted. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP-10. Primer shall be one coat of 3.5 to 4.5 mil DFT epoxy, following which two coats of 4 to 6 DFT (per coat) epoxy paint shall be applied. Paint shall be by Tnemec, Carboline or approved equal.

R. Equipment Quality Standard and Permanent Identification: Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, the rated capacity, head, speed, h.p., rpm and all other pertinent data shall be attached to each pump and motor.

2800.8.2.2 Appurtenances. The pump discharge elbow connection shall be permanently installed in the wetwell along with the discharge piping. Each pump shall be automatically connected and sealed to its discharge connection elbow when lowered into place.

Each pump shall be mounted on a sliding guide bracket which can be used to guide the pump into place. The discharge connection shall be bolted to the floor of the wetwell and shall be designed to receive the pump connection without any need for bolts or nuts. The discharge connection shall be attached to the floor by means of Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. Each pump shall ride on dual guide bars and shall be standard weight ¾-in Schedule 40 Type 316 stainless steel pipe. Guide rails shall be stainless steel.

Each pump shall be fitted with a Type 316 stainless steel lifting chain and a Type 316 stainless steel chain connector between the pump bail and chain. The lifting chain shall be rated for five times the pump weight (minimum). Unless noted otherwise, the lifting chain combined length shall be equal to the wet well depth (top slab finished grade to wet well bottom) plus six feet to permit raising the pump for inspection and removal. The lifting chain shall be attached to a lifting bail on the pump. Eyebolts will not be considered as an acceptable alternate to a lifting bail.

For lift stations with discharge piping, and valves installed above ground, provide a watertight, weatherproof

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


station enclosure with two hinge and latch access panels per side of the lift station. Access panels shall be sized and located appropriately to permit routine maintenance operations. Routine maintenance includes, but is not limited to, frequently performed lift station adjustments, and inspection of electrical components, controls, and valves. Hinges shall be continuous type, latch shall engage the enclosure at a minimum of four places, and shall be protected by a keyed lock. Provide a screened vent (insect screen) on one side of the enclosure for ventilation. Screen shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Enclosure shall be secured to the concrete base by means of anchor bolts.

The station enclosure shall contain and enclose all valves, and associated controls and shall be constructed to enhance serviceability by incorporating the following design characteristics: Two access panels per side of station shall be provided. Panels shall be sized and placed to permit routine maintenance operations through the panel openings of the enclosure. For these purposes, routine maintenance shall include frequently performed adjustments and inspections of the electrical components, controls and valves. The access panels shall be provided with a hinge and latch. Hinge shall be the continuous type. Latch shall engage the enclosure at not less than three places and be protected by a keyed lock. One enclosure side shall contain a screened vent to maximize air flow for enclosure ventilation. Station enclosure, less base, must be removable or able to be disassembled following the removal of reusable hardware. Removal or disassembly of the enclosure shall be accomplished by not more than two maintenance personnel without the use of lifting equipment. The station enclosure shall be manufactured of molded reinforced orthophthalic polyester resins with a minimum of 30% fiberglass, and a maximum of 70% resin. Resin fillers or extenders shall not be used. Glass fibers shall have a minimum of average length of 1 1/4 inches. Major design considerations shall be given to structural stability, corrosion resistance, and watertight properties. The polyester laminates shall provide a balance of mechanical, chemical, and electrical properties to insure long life. They must be impervious to micro-organisms, mildew, mold, fungus, corrosive liquids, and gases which can reasonably be expected to be present in the environment surrounding the wet well. All interior surfaces of the housing shall be coated with a polyester resin-rich finish. It shall provide: 1. Maintenance-free service 2. Abrasion resistance 3. Protection from sewage, greases, oils, gasoline, and other common chemicals 4. The outside of the enclosure shall be coated with a suitable pigmented resin, compounded to insure

long maintenance-free life. An exhaust blower shall be mounted in the roof of the enclosure. Blower capacity shall be sufficient to change station air a minimum of once every two minutes. Blower motor shall be operated automatically and shall be turned on at approximately 70 degrees F and shall be turned off at 55 degrees F. Blower motor and control circuit shall be protected by a thermal-magnetic air circuit breaker to provide overcurrent and overload protection. Blower exhaust outlet shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain, snow, rocks, and foreign material.

Pressure transducers with float backups shall be provided for the control of the pumps and alarms, and floats shall be located such that they are not affected by incoming flow. Floats and level sensors shall be as specified below.

2800.8.3 Valve Vault, Piping and Valves

2800.8.3.1 Valve Vault. If a separate vault is required to house the valves, it shall be a poured concrete or pre-cast box with an approved aluminum access hatch with safety grating and steps, the same as for the wet well. Valve vault shall be sized appropriately to provide sufficient clearances, for removal and reinstallation of piping and valves. In no case shall valves be placed inside the wetwell. The entire valve vault shall be sealed on the outside with two part urethane asphalt applied to provide a dry film thickness of 20 mils.

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


Pipe penetrations shall be sealed using a modular seal as manufactured by Link-Seal or approved equal. Pipe penetration holes shall be sized to accommodate the piping along with the modular seal. The vault shall include a 2 ft. x 2 ft. square sump for accumulation and pumping of spilled fluids. The valve vault floor shall be sloped at 1% towards the sump to facilitate easy drainage into the wetwell. Aluminum checker cover plates shall be provided.

2800.8.3.2 Bypass Connection. The lift station’s common discharge forcemain header shall include a bypass arrangement to facilitate operation during times the pump(s) or the forcemain is not functioning. The bypass arrangement shall be located inside of the valve vault/enclosure. Piping and valves shall be the same size and material as the common discharge forcemain and shall meet all pertinent requirements specified herein. The bypass piping shall include a vertical 90 deg bend, spool piping of appropriate length, a shut off valve, and shall terminate with a male disconnect fitting.

2800.8.3.3 Ductile Iron Piping. Discharge lines from the pumps shall be minimum 4 inches in diameter to convey sanitary sewer flows at a minimum velocity of 3 fps. Piping shall be ductile iron pipe, and shall conform to the physical and chemical requirements of AWWA C151 and shall have dimensions and wall thickness for a minimum pressure of 250 psi. Fittings shall be ductile iron or cast iron conforming to AWWA C110, 150 psi minimum pressure rating.

Flanged discharge piping shall be used in the vault, and shall be in conformance with AWWA C115, and shall be suitable for the maximum expected discharge pressures. Flanged joints shall be with factory applied screwed 125 lb. long hub companion flanges conforming to ANSI B16.1. Flanges shall be faced and drilled after being threaded to pipe, be true 90 degrees with the pipe axis and shall be flush with the end of the pipe. Flanged pipe shall be cut true to length. Ring gaskets shall be rubber with cloth insertion. Gaskets shall be 1/16-in thick.

Buried ductile iron piping shall use restrained mechanical joints and shall be polywrapped in accordance with Standard Specification Section 209.

Coatings for pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with Specification Section 209. Piping shall be properly supported in the vault.

The piping shall be joined into a single restrained forcemain immediately outside of the valve vault, by means of 90 degree bends or wye fittings.

2800.8.3.4 PVC Piping. All PVC service (not force main) piping, unless noted otherwise, shall be Schedule 80.

2800.8.3.5 Valves. Check valves shall be ball check type with clean-out port permitting access to the inside of the valve without removal from the pipe line. The valve shall include body bosses to accommodate additional components. The valves shall be iron body with Buna N vulcanized metal balls, rubber seals, 150 psi working water pressure, nonshock and hydrostatically tested at 300 psi. Ends shall be 125 lb. ANSI B16.1 flanges. Check valves shall be so constructed that ball may easily be removed and replaced without removing the valve from the line.

Plug valves with lever actuators shall be of offset disc type, 1/4 turn, non-lubricated, serviceable (able to be repacked) under full line pressure and capable of sealing in both directions at rated pressure. Disc shall be completely out of flow path when open. Plug valve bodies shall be of cast iron, 30,000 psi tensile strength, ASTM A 126, Grade B, or of ductile iron, ASTM A 536 and of top entry, bolted bonnet design, cast with integral flanges conforming to connecting piping. Exposed bolts, nuts, and washers shall be zinc or cadmium- plated, except for submerged valves, which shall have Type 316 stainless steel hardware. Plug valves specified herein shall be manufactured by DeZurik, Pratt or approved equal.

Air release valves, suitable for sewer service, shall be installed downstream of the swing check valves or per the Engineer’s direction. The small orifice air release valves shall be furnished with reinforced nylon and stainless steel body. Discharge from the air release valves shall be directed to the wetwell. The float ball shall be constructed of foamed polypropylene and attached to a stainless steel rod. Float ball hangers shall

Revised 6-15-20

REVISED 6-15-20

mark

Polygon

ISSUED FOR BID


be provided for all float ball assemblies, hangers shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel. Air release valve installations shall include schedule 80 PVC purge lines that terminate 6 inches above the floor of the valve vault. Air release valves for sewer service shall be as manufactured by A.R.I. or approved equal.

Valves shall be located in dedicated vaults/enclosures. Valves shall not be located inside the wet well.

2800.8.3.6 Pressure Gauges and Transmitters. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft Stainless Steel Series 1279 Duragauge Pressure Gauges. Gauges shall be glycerin filled or Ashcroft’s PLUS!TM Performance with diaphragm seals. Gauge shall be a minimum of 4 ½-inch diameter and shall range from 0 psig to a minimum of 25 percent over the calculated maximum expected TDH. All fittings and cocks shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel. When pressure transmitters are required or specified, they shall be Siemens or approved equal. Pressure transmitters shall be capable of operation in the process temperature range of - 20⁰ C to 80⁰ C. Output signal shall be 4-20 mA DC with HART protocol, linear with pressure. Pressure transmitter shall be housed in a NEMA 4X, explosion proof enclosure, approved for Class I, Division I, Groups C and D. Isolating diaphragm and other wetted metal parts shall be 316 Stainless Steel. Gaskets and O-rings shall be Teflon. The sensor fill fluid shall be silicone.

2800.8.4 Motorized Jib Crane. When specified in the contract documents, Contractor shall provide a jib crane for pumps weighing 1.5 Tons and above. Jib cranes shall be motorized, free standing pillar type, base plate mounted, bolted to the concrete structure. Jib Crane rated capacity shall be 2-times the weight of the largest pump. The jib crane shall consist of a motorized horizontal boom mounted on a heavy wall structural steel pipe, with wall thickness sized for minimum deflection. The mast shall have a large diameter base plate reinforced with heavy steel gussets for continuous alignment and stiffness. The crane head section shall be a rigid steel plate box type welded construction for minimum deflection between the boom and mast. The head section shall house the motor, and provide a weather protected enclosure for the associated bearings and rollers supporting the boom. The boom shall rotate a full 360 degrees on a Timken or approved equal tapered roller bearing, providing full capacity vertical and radial thrust loading. The lower section of the head shall revolve around the mast on a pair of steel rollers equipped with self-aligning roller bearings. Rollers shall be adjustable to level the boom. All bearings shall be easily accessible for lubrication. The jib crane boom shall be a rolled steel I-beam section reinforced as required, with long wearing tapered flange for smooth trolley travel. End stops shall be provided to limit trolley travel at both ends of the boom. The entire unit shall be designed to meet or exceed the requirements of AISC and for outdoor installation.

Each jib crane shall be furnished with a motorized trolley. Trolley shall be 4-wheel type, with hardened steel wheels supported on combination radial and thrust anti-friction pre-lubricated bearings. The jib crane shall be primed and finish painted in the manufacturer’s shop. Surface preparation and painting shall be suitable for outdoor installation. A jib crane shall be provided when shown on the drawings.

2800.8.5 Pump Controls (Duplex Stations or Above). The systems integrator should be located within a maximum of 150 mile radius of the City. The systems integrator shall have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in designing, testing, building and installing control panel and/or systems for submersible lift stations. Experience on similar work other than lift stations will not be considered equivalent. Replacement parts and equipment for the entire control system are to be in stock at all times by more than one local supplier within 30 miles of the City. The City’s lift station personnel are currently licensed and trained for “Siemens Portal V12 or Higher”, any other software to be used must be pre-approved and all license keys, development software and training (minimum of 40 hours) by the manufacturer’s certified Engineer with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience shall be included. The systems integrator that will be working on the City’s SCADA (located at Lucas Wastewater Treatment Plant) system shall be Citect certified (in Configuration). Citect certification shall be submitted along with the Controls System submittal. Prior to implementation of the controls system, the systems integrator shall spend a minimum of 40 hours with the City’s Lift Station staff to discuss the controls system in detail.

The packaged lift station control panel shall be as described herein, factory wired and assembled. The PLC

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


shall be programmed at the factory. The entire unit, up and including the controls, shall be provided as a single packaged system, by one vendor, with single source responsibility for the entire unit. Field wiring by the Contractor will include single point connection for power to the lift station and communications wiring from the factory programmed PLC to the telemetry panel which will be Contractor provided/Contractor installed on a separate field fabricated rack as detailed on the drawings. Establishing communication with the City’s SCADA system will be the work of the Systems Integrator.

2800.8.5.1 Control Panel. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4x stainless steel construction and shall be located inside the fiberglass enclosure as shown on the Drawings. The control panel assembly, and level instruments shall be UL labeled for industrial control panels in accordance with UL-508. Power supply to the pump control panel will be 240 or 480 Volt, 3-phase. Provide an individual thermal magnetic circuit breaker/disconnect switch interlocked with the door handle.

The control leads to and from the wetwell shall be low voltage, microwatt type designed to not exceed their normal voltage or current values due to system component failure. The panel shall include lamacoid nameplates, and the following displays, switches and alarm lights. The information listed below (A through

D) is applicable for small lift stations (<15 Hp) with a new radio system. For other lift station scenarios (medium and large lift stations) and radio scenarios (existing Motorola radio or new radio) refer to the controls specifications.

A. Panel Mounted Lights and display for the indication of:

1. High Motor Temperature Alarm (per pump) – Yellow Light

2. Motor leakage Alarm (per pump) – Yellow Light

3. High Water Level Alarm – Red Light

4. Pump Failure Alarm (per pump) – Yellow Light

5. Pump Hour Meter

B. Panel Mounted Switches :

1. Hand/Off/Auto switch (per pump)

C. Isolated signals and dry contacts to interface with the SCADA system:

1. Pump Running (Discrete Output – per pump)

2. Pump Failure Alarm (Discrete Output – per pump)

3. High Water Alarm (Discrete Output)

4. Wetwell Level (4-20 mA signal)

5. Power Failure

6. Low Level

7. High Sump Level (where applicable)

8. Pump Off

9. Door Security Alarm (where applicable)

D. Panel mounted push buttons

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


1. Alarm Horn Silence

2. Pump Failure Reset

The control panel shall communicate with the City’s SCADA system through a radio connection depending on the location of the pump station and the City’s preference. The Contractor shall coordinate with City to integrate lift station controls into the SCADA system.

2800.8.5.1.1 Duplex Controller. Pump Controller/Drive Operation and Functionality 1. High/Low Level Sump Control: The pump controls system shall provide automatic level control via means of a submersible pressure transducer (4-20mADC) and non-mercury liquid level float switch. User-programmable Start Level shall indicate the point at which the pump will start. Upon activation the pump shall run at maximum speed for a pre-determined period, then ramp down to the energy efficient Optimal speed, calculated by the pump controller/drive. When the water level reaches the Stop Level, the pump shall stop. The Optimal Speed shall either be calculated by the pump controller/drive or manually entered by the user. In case of high inflow, the pump controller/drive shall increase pump speed until the water level begins to decrease. When the water level reaches the Stop Level, the pump shall stop. In case of very high inflow, in a duplex installation, when a single pump is unable to overcome the inflow conditions even at maximum speed, additional pumps shall be activated and run at maximum speed until the Stop Level is reached. If water levels continue to rise, a High Level Alarm shall be activated. The pump controller/drive shall incorporate a Minimum Speed function that prevents the pump from operating at speeds too low to move water based on the pump curve. 2. Run Time Averaging (Duplex Application Only): In cases of duplex pumps, the pump controller/drive shall provide capability to balance run times for even wear. This shall be an internal function of the controller/drive and not require external devices, such as an Alternating Relay. The function shall operate by determining a “random” start level based on the Start Level setting. Each controller/drive shall determine its own random start level independent of each other. New random start levels will be determined every 24 hours. The pump with the lowest random start level shall be first to start on any given pump cycle. The second pump shall remain in Standby capacity in case the lead pump shall not be able to lower the water level as described in the section above. By recalculating the random start levels every 24 hours, balanced run times are accomplished. 3. Pump Cleaning Function: The Pump controller/drive shall incorporate a “self-cleaning” function to remove debris from the impeller. The cleaning shall be triggered by three circumstances:

Soft Clogging: When motor current equals 20% or greater above rated motor current, in the drive, for a period of 7 seconds.

Hard Clogging: When motor current equals 80% or greater above rated current for a period of 0.01 seconds. Schedule Cleaning: The pump controller/ drive can be pre-programmed to perform cleaning regularly. The

cleaning function shall consist of forced stopping, reversal and forward runs timed to allow for debris to fall from the impeller. After cleaning cycle is complete, controller/drive shall resume automatic operation. 4. Sump Cleaning Function: The pump controller/drive shall incorporate a sump cleaning function to ensure surface solids and grease is regularly removed from the sump. The sump cleaning function shall perform regularly when enabled by the operator. Sump cleaning shall consist of the following functions:

Sump cleaning is triggered when internal timer expires and during a normal pump down cycle. Pump is automatically ramped to maximum speed. Pump runs at maximum speed for designated time or until the pump are “snoring”. When Sump Cleaning is over, the pump is shut off and resumes normal operation.

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


5. Pipe Cleaning Function: The pump controller/drive shall incorporate a pipe cleaning function to avoid discharge pipe sedimentation and clogging due to reduced pump speed. This shall be an automatic feature that initiates with every pump cycle. Upon reaching Pump Start Level, the drive shall operate the pump at 100% speed for a determined time before ramping down to the most energy efficient speed for the duration of the cycle. 6. Energy Efficient Speed Finder: The pump controller/drive shall provide a function that automatically calculates the most energy efficient speed for the pump based on station inflow characteristics. An algorithm calculates the optimal speed whereby the most water is pumped using the least amount of energy, the optimal speed is constantly adjusted to account for changes inflow without requiring operator adjustment, multiple setpoints, etc. The energy efficient function prevents the drive from running off of the system curve for the pump. This will ensure maximum hydraulic efficiency as well as electrical efficiency is maintained. 7. Alarms & Monitoring: The pump drive shall provide alarms and monitoring for the drive, pump and sump. Alarms shall be presented on the LCD display, via a Summary Alarm relay and via Modbus registers. All alarms, when occurring, shall remain active until reset. Alarms shall have a built-in 4 second delay to prevent nuisance tripping. Alarms shall be as follows:

Pump Monitoring: Pump Over Temperature (thermal contacts in motor stator) Pump Seal Leak (FLS leakage sensor) Sump Monitoring: High Sump Level (via level float switch or submersible transducer) Submersible transducer Sensor Error (Submersible transducer is not connected, reports faulty values

or the wrong start level is used) Pump controller/drive Monitoring (includes, but not limited to): Drive Overcurrent Drive Overload Trip Drive Undervoltage Drive Overvoltage Drive Overtemperature (Internal) Drive Overtemperature (ambient) Drive Undertemperature (ambient) Input Phase Loss Drive Output Max Torque Exceeded

2800.8.6 Electrical.

2800.8.6.1 Control Panel Enclosure. Control panel enclosure shall be constructed from 12 gauge 316 stainless steel with a #4 finish. All hardware on exterior of panel shall be stainless steel. Exterior door shall be held shut with pad lockable, 3-point door latch by Austin, or approved equal. The padlock is to be provided by the City. Inner door shall be held shut with latch, Emka wingknob and cam, or approved equal. All doors shall be mounted to the enclosure with continuous hinges. Exterior door shall be gasketed to provide a watertight seal to the enclosure. Subpanel and inner door shall be 12-gauge mild steel primed and painted white. All control switches, pushbuttons, elapsed time meters, and indicator lights shall be mounted on or through the inner door. All panel wiring and equipment layout shall be performed per NEMA and JIC specifications. NEC gutter spacing shall be observed. A minimum of 6 inch additional D.I.N. rail shall be provided for future mounting expansion.

2800.8.6.2 Power Distribution Block. Provide a main power distribution block sized for incoming power to the panel. Each pole of the block shall be supplied with a clear cover for operator protection. Power distribution block shall be by Ferraz Shawmut or approved equal.

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


2800.8.6.3 Surge Suppression. Provide a silicon oxide varistor surge/lightning suppressor connected to the power distribution block and sized for incoming voltage. Minimum ratings shall be 60,000 amps, 1500 Joules. Suppressor shall be by General Electric, Westinghouse or approved equal.

2800.8.6.4 Phase Monitor. Where three-phase motors are controlled, provide a plug-in style phase monitor designed to monitor phase loss, under voltage, and phase sequence with a SPDT contact to interrupt all control power in the event of phase loss. Phase monitor shall be supplied with fused protection of the three phase sensing circuit. Phase monitor shall be Diversified Electronics SLA series, or approved equal. Fuseholder shall be three-pole Ferraz Shawmut, or approved equal. Fuses shall be fast-acting as manufactured by Ferraz Shawmut, or approved equal.

2800.8.6.5 Circuit Breakers. Provide individual, properly sized, thermal-magnetic circuit breaker for each load served. Combination circuit breaker and overload mechanism shall not be allowed. Circuit breakers for motors and other loads shall have a minimum rating of 10,000 AIC (230 VAC breakers) or 14,000 AIC (480 VAC breakers).

Provide individual, properly sized, thermal-magnetic circuit breaker for each of the following:

A. Transformer

B. Each motor load

Provide 1-pole, 20-amp circuit breakers for the following loads:

A. Control circuit

B. Panel receptacle/condensation heater/service light.

2800.8.6.6 Variable Frequency Drives. Each pump motor to be provided with electronic variable frequency drive (VFD) controllers sized for the motor horse power and amp indicated in the Drawings, continuous at 230V, +/- 10%. Include digital indicators for start, stop, run, fault, etc. Drive to be capable of operation for supply line frequency that can vary +/- 20% during steady state operation. VFD to be capable of 10 starts per hour at 400% of full rated current for 12 seconds per start. VFD to be by Schneider, Siemens or approved equal. 2800.8.6.7 Transformer. A 120 and a 24 volt control circuit transformer with fuse protection shall be included. If 120 volt, single phase is not available, a minimum 2KVA dry-type transformer shall be supplied with primary and secondary short circuit protection. Control power shall be 120 volt. Control circuit shall be connected so that a power outage of any duration does not require manual re-start of system.

2800.8.6.8 Fuseholders and Fuses. Provide a fuseholder and fuse for the control circuit, minimum rating 5 amps (ampacity not to exceed relay contact rating). Fuseholders for control fuses shall be finger safe with neon light indication for a blown fuse. Control fuse fuseholders shall be Ferraz Shawmut, Entrelec, or approved equal.

2800.8.6.9 Terminal Blocks. Numbered terminal blocks shall be supplied for all field terminations. Current capacity of terminal strips shall be equal to the load served. Terminal blocks shall be suitable for minimum 12 AWG wire at not less than 300 volts. Terminal blocks for control interface shall be by Entrelec or approved equal.

2800.8.6.10 Interior Service Light. Provide an interior 1600 lumens LED light bulb w/ safety lens fastened to the top of the enclosure with two-position “Off-On” selector knob to control. Incandescent light fixtures shall not be acceptable. Light shall be mounted without penetrating the panel outer skin with screws or fasteners.

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


2800.8.6.11 Entry Switch. An entry switch shall be mounted in the panel, which shall close a contact wired to the telemetry unit when the exterior door of the enclosure is not closed. Switch shall be by Microswitch or approved equal.

2800.8.6.12 Receptacle. Provide a 20-amp G.F.I. duplex receptacle connected to a separate circuit breaker, as described elsewhere, and mounted on the control panel inner door.

2800.8.6.13 Temperature Control. The control panel shall include an exhaust system to maintain a temperature below 105 degrees F. The exhaust system shall include an exhaust fan and appropriately sized air intake. Exhaust fan motors shall operate on 120 V, 60 Hz power and shall consist of an integral thermostat. Inter air conditioning system shall be provided for pumps operated on VFDs.

2800.8.6.14 Condensation Heater. Provide a 100 watt, 120 VAC silicone rubber self-adhesive condensation heater mounted on a flange with integral 40 degree thermostat. Heater shall be as manufactured by Watlow or approved equal.

2800.8.6.15 Alternator (If applicable). Provide an automatic electronic alternator for alternating pump operation on successive automatic cycles. Relay shall incorporate LED position indicators and a toggle switch to select pump #1 or pump #2 as the lead pump, or to allow automatic alternation. Alternator shall be by Autocon Industries or approved equal.

2800.8.6.16 Relays (If applicable). Relays shall be general purpose plug-in relays with standard mounting configurations. The relays shall have the number of poles as shown on the drawings with neon indicating lamp and test button integral to each relay. Relay contact ratings shall be minimum 5 amps.

2800.8.6.17 Time Delay Relays (If applicable). Time delay relays shall be dial or D.I.P. switch selectable, and shall have contact ratings of not less than 10 amps. Switch settings shall be labeled on the relay. Time delay relays shall be by General Electric, or approved equal.

2800.8.6.18 Selector Switches and Pilot Lights. Selector switches and pilot lights are not required at locations that include a touch screen HMI. Selector switches shall be 30 mm oil tight type with lever operators and 10 amp contacts. Knob operators shall not be accepted. Contact blocks shall be provided as required and shall be rated for a nominal voltage of 500 VAC and 10 amps. Control switches shall be Cutler- Hammer or approved equal. Contact blocks shall be Cutler-Hammer or approved equal. The following selector switches shall be included (per pump where applicable):

A. Hand/Off/Auto

B. Pump Selector with Auto option (Ex: Pump 1, Auto, Pump 2)

Pilot lights shall be push-to-test, oil-tight industrial units utilizing 120 volt bulbs (unless otherwise specified). Lenses shall be colored as shown on the drawings. Control panel lights shall be modular construction as manufactured by Cutler Hammer or approved equal. Contact blocks shall be Cutler-Hammer or approved equal. LED type lights shall not be acceptable. Provide pilot lights for the following functions (per pump where applicable):

A. Pump Off Green

B. High Level Red

C. Pump Run Red

D. Motor Overload Amber

E. Pump Seal Fail Amber

F. Pump High Temp. Amber

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


G. Backup Float Ball Mode Red

2800.8.6.19 Pushbuttons. Pushbuttons shall be oil-tight industrial units. Contact blocks shall be provided as required and shall be rated for a nominal voltage of 500 VAC and 10 amps. Control panel pushbuttons shall be modular construction as manufactured by Cutler Hammer or approved equal. Provide push-buttons for the following functions:

A. Alarm horn silence

B. Pump Fail Reset

C. Backup Float Ball Reset

2800.8.6.20 Elapsed Time Meters. Provide an elapsed time meter for each pump. Meter shall be 6- digit, non-resettable, reading in hours and tenths of hours. Elapsed time meter shall be by Eagle Signal, General Electric; Westinghouse or approved equal.

2800.8.6.21 Seal Fail Relay. Provide a conductance actuated moisture sensing relay for each submersible pump controlled with field adjustable sensitivity. Specialized relays/sensors, if required by the pump manufacturer, shall be supplied to the panel manufacturer by the pump manufacturer prior to panel construction. Seal Fail Relay shall be Diversified Electronics, Syrelec, or approved equal.

2800.8.6.22 Alarm Light. Provide a red strobe light mounted to the top, exterior of the enclosure. Minimum ratings shall be 1.5 Joules at 70 flashes per minute. The strobe light shall be fully sealed to prevent water from entering the enclosure and be attached by mounting screws from inside the enclosure to prevent tampering.

2800.8.6.23 Ground Buss/Lugs. Provide a ground lug sized for incoming power ground near the power distribution block. Provide a ground lug sized for pump ground near pump power wire terminations. Provide a ground buss for control equipment grounding, minimum 6 termination points.

2800.8.6.24 Corrosion Inhibitor. Provide a corrosion inhibitor mounted inside the control panel. Corrosion inhibitor shall be Hoffman or approved equal.

2800.8.6.25 Wiring. Power distribution wiring on the line side of panel fuses or circuit breakers shall be sized for the load served, minimum 12 AWG, Control wiring shall be minimum #16 gauge SIS type stranded wire for internal control panel circuits. All control wires shall be numbered at each termination corresponding to the master wiring diagram with clip-sleeve or heat-shrink type wire markers. Wrap-on or adhesive wire markers shall not be allowed. All color coding for wires shall be per applicable NEC codes. All wiring shall be continuous between devices with no wire splices allowed in circuit runs.

2800.8.6.26 Nameplates. Provide adhesive backed printed nameplates for all internal devices such as contactors, circuit breakers, and relays. Provide engraved phenolic nameplates, black letters on white background, for door-mounted devices such as selector switches, push-buttons, circuit breaker toggles, and pilot lights. Nameplates shall be secured firmly to the panel.

2800.8.6.27 Control Panel Electrical Rack. An electrical equipment rack, as shown on drawings, shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the control panel for installation by the electrical contractor. The equipment rack shall be constructed of double-back Unistrut™ , Type 304 stainless steel material with required conduit connecting meterbase, fused disconnect switch, control panel, seal fittings, and fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) junction box. If a lightning arrestor for the control panel is specified elsewhere, it may be mounted on the exterior of the disconnect switch, in lieu of the control panel, if desired.

All wiring between components on the electrical rack shall be run in galvanized heavy wall conduit, minimum ½ inch diameter. All wire shall be not less than 12 AWG stranded type THHN/THWN, except control wiring, which may be 14 or 16 AWG stranded type THHN/THWN. All wiring shall be color coded by wire

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


insulation.

2800.9 EXECUTION. All equipment and accessories delivered to the job site shall be inspected for damage by both the Contractor and the City or their representative. Equipment shall be stored per the manufacturer’s recommendations. All equipment or materials found to have defects, whether before or after installation, will be rejected and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the City.

Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and as shown on plans. The pump assemblies shall be installed under the supervision of manufacturer’s authorized representative. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Failure to comply with these specifications will result in the rejection of the work by the City.

2800.9.1 Installation of Structures. All structures such as the wetwell, valve vault, fences, concrete bases and the control panel base shall be constructed as detailed on the plans and as called for in these specifications. All access frames and covers shall be properly set and installed as recommended by the manufacturer.

2800.9.2 Pump and Motor Installation. The pump and motor units shall be carefully installed as recommended by the manufacturer and the seals between pumps and pump bases must mate as intended. The pump and motor units shall be properly wired and field checked to see that they can be easily removed and replaced by means of the lifting chains and do not bind on the guide rails.

2800.9.3 Electrical and Controls. The electrical and control system shall be as specified hereinbefore and shall all be installed in accordance with the NEC. The complete system shall be provided and installed by a single supplier. The Contractor shall contact the local power supplier and install all lines to the control panel, including metering in accordance with their requirements. The electric meter shall be installed as close to the station as allowed by the power utility. Seal all conduit penetrations with Perma Gum or Duct Seal. Provide separate conduit for each pump and float switch. Provide stainless steel hooks for float switches.

2800.9.4 Installation of Piping. Piping shall be installed as shown on the plans and basically in accordance with the Standard Specifications of the City of Shreveport.

2800.9.5 Startup & Testing. Prior to testing, all equipment shall be calibrated and verified by the pump station manufacturer’s authorized representative. Contractor shall provide City completed Equipment Supplier’s Certificate of Installation prior to startup and testing, blank form provided at the end of this specification. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the City’s representative. Contractor shall provide the City with one-week written notice prior to testing.

Leakage tests performed on manholes, shall be performed on the wetwell, see specification 2300. Pump testing shall consist of pumping water out of the wetwell to ensure that the pumps operate as proposed. Pumping conditions shall be verified against the withdrawal rate of the wetwell, and the pressure gauge reading. During pumping tests, the valves and the flow meter shall also be tested for proper operation, leaks and performance. All controls and alarms shall also be tested. All alarm conditions shall be simulated and the City’s SCADA system shall be programmed and shown to operate as intended. City’s staff shall be present whenever testing water is needed to verify that proper backflow protection is installed and used. If defective work product or equipment is found during the course of testing, the Contractor shall repair/rectify such defects to the satisfaction of the City, and repeat tests at no cost to the City. Following these tests, the pump station shall successfully operate for a period of 24 hours.

After issuing Final Completion, the City will operate the submersible lift station for a minimum of 30 calendar days to verify proper operation and performance of the facility. Any work items found during this time to not meet the specifications will be rectified by the Contractor at no cost to the City.

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


2800.9.6 Site Cleanup, Restoration and Grading. After work is completed, the site of the lift station installation shall be cleared of all construction material and other debris. Grading shall consist of providing proper drainage and all sites shall be left in a neat, clean and acceptable condition. For all property the site shall be restored to a condition equal to, or better than, it‘s condition before the work was started. In any existing or proposed lawn areas, the final restoration shall include sodding.

END OF SECTION

REVISED 6-15-20

ISSUED FOR BID


EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION

City

Project

Contract No.

EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SECTION

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION

I , Authorized representative of (Print Name)

(Print Manufacturer's Name)

hereby CERTIFY that (Print equipment name and model with serial no.)

installed for the subject project has (have) been installed in a satisfactory manner, has (have) been tested and adjusted, and is (are) ready for final acceptance testing and operation on :

Date

Time

CERTIFIED BY: (Signature of Manufacturer's Representative)

Date:

REVISED 6-15-20

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS

Documents

Transcript of TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND SPECIAL PROVISIONS